WO2015042771A1 - 一种半静态调度方法及用户设备 - Google Patents

一种半静态调度方法及用户设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015042771A1
WO2015042771A1 PCT/CN2013/084073 CN2013084073W WO2015042771A1 WO 2015042771 A1 WO2015042771 A1 WO 2015042771A1 CN 2013084073 W CN2013084073 W CN 2013084073W WO 2015042771 A1 WO2015042771 A1 WO 2015042771A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
uplink
downlink
sps
subframe
transmission
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2013/084073
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
权威
吕永霞
杨晓东
张戬
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to JP2016516550A priority Critical patent/JP6216042B2/ja
Priority to MX2016003789A priority patent/MX357739B/es
Priority to BR112016006415A priority patent/BR112016006415A8/pt
Priority to CN201380004159.4A priority patent/CN104737575B/zh
Priority to RU2016115722A priority patent/RU2632250C1/ru
Priority to EP13894665.2A priority patent/EP3038398B1/en
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to PCT/CN2013/084073 priority patent/WO2015042771A1/zh
Publication of WO2015042771A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015042771A1/zh
Priority to US15/078,838 priority patent/US20160205683A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Priority to ZA2016/02790A priority patent/ZA201602790B/en
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/02Resource partitioning among network components, e.g. reuse partitioning
    • H04W16/10Dynamic resource partitioning
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/14Two-way operation using the same type of signal, i.e. duplex

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a semi-persistent scheduling method and user equipment. Background technique
  • the 10 ms radio frame is divided into two half frames of length 5 ms, and each half frame is composed of 5 subframes of length lms, including 4 normal subframes and 1 special subframe, the normal subframe consists of two 0.5ms, and the special subframe consists of 3 special time slots (uplink pilot time slot UpPTS, guard interval GP and downlink pilot time slot DwPTS, where DwPTS is used for downlink Signal transmission, UpPTS is used for uplink signal transmission, and GP is used for protection interval of TDD uplink and downlink conversion.
  • uplink pilot time slot UpPTS UpPTS
  • guard interval GP guard interval GP
  • DwPTS downlink pilot time slot
  • DwPTS downlink pilot time slot
  • UpPTS UpPTS is used for uplink Signal transmission
  • UpPTS is used for uplink signal transmission
  • GP is used for protection interval of TDD uplink and downlink conversion.
  • SPS Semi-Persistent Scheduling
  • the main method is to configure a set of SPS-related parameters for the UE through the RRC (Radio Resource Control) message.
  • the SPS is used as an example. Including the SPS period, implicitly releasing the conditions of the uplink SPS, etc.; the following line SPS is taken as an example, and the configuration parameters may include the SPS period, the uplink feedback resource corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission, and the number of HARQ processes reserved for the SPS.
  • the SPS transmission resource is then activated by the SPS activation command, and the UE periodically performs SPS transmission using the SPS transmission resource according to the SPS activation command.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration configured for the UE may change dynamically.
  • the direction of some subframes does not change (such as fixed uplink subframes or fixed downlink subframes), but some subframe directions may change (such as flexible subframes).
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration changes there may be a subframe that is originally used for the uplink SPS becomes the downlink, or the subframe that is originally used for the downlink SPS becomes the uplink, and the SPS transmission is subject to the SPS transmission. influences.
  • the prior art does not solve the method for implementing and running the SPS mechanism when certain subframes in the TDD system can be used for flexible subframes. Summary of the invention
  • the technical problem to be solved by the present application is to prevent the presence of flexible subframes from affecting the normal transmission of the SPS when the TDD uplink and downlink ratio is dynamically configured for the UE.
  • the present application proposes a semi-persistent scheduling method, which can enable the SPS to be normally transmitted without being affected by flexible subframes when dynamically configuring the TDD uplink-downlink ratio for the UE.
  • the present application provides a semi-persistent scheduling method, including: determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame, where an uplink and downlink attribute of each subframe in the fixed subframe set is uplink and downlink of the TDD frame The proportional configuration remains unchanged when the dynamic configuration changes; the SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the determining, by the determining, the set of the fixed subframes in the TDD frame comprises: acquiring an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink ratio The configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations; determining a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes remain unchanged in the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations to form the fixed subframe set.
  • the step of determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame includes: acquiring indication information, where the indication information directly specifies the fixed subframe The subframe in the collection.
  • the determining, by the determining, the set of the fixed subframes in the TDD frame comprises: acquiring at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration;
  • the fixed subframe set is formed by referring to a subframe of a specific attribute in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the fixed subframe set is a fixed uplink subframe set and fixed At least one of the downlink subframe sets, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink subframes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, and the fixed downlink subframe set
  • the subframe is a downlink subframe when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes; the step of performing SPS transmission on the fixed subframe set further includes: on the fixed uplink subframe set Perform uplink SPS transmission, or perform downlink SPS transmission on the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the subframe that is formed by the specific attribute in the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration forms the fixed
  • the step of the subframe set further includes: forming, by the uplink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, the fixed uplink subframe set, where the first reference uplink and downlink proportions are matched
  • the downlink subframe and the special subframe that are centered form the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used to form the fixed uplink subframe set is different from the forming The first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used by the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion is configured as a proportional configuration indicated by the first system information block.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration includes uplink and downlink of a downlink HARQ timing reference At least one of a proportional configuration and an uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, where the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the downlink HARQ timing forms the fixed uplink subframe set, by the uplink HARQ
  • the downlink subframe and the special subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the timing reference form the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the step of determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame includes: acquiring an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink ratio The configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations; and selecting, from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the same number of subframes in which the uplink and downlink attributes are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission, and is selected by the selected The subframes in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration that are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission form the fixed subframe set.
  • the TDD is obtained by using at least one of a system broadcast message and a dedicated RRC message The set of uplink and downlink proportions of the frame.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method further includes: The uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set perform feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission on the same subframe as the transmission direction of the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method further includes: Obtaining on the same subframe in the fixed subframe set as the transmission direction of the SPS control instruction
  • the SPS control instruction wherein the SPS control instruction comprises a combination of one or more of an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, an SPS retransmission data block instruction, and an SPS release instruction.
  • the subframe for acquiring the SPS control instruction is in the fixed subframe set A downlink subframe capable of scheduling SPS transmissions.
  • the step of performing SPS transmission on the subframe includes: acquiring a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission; and offsetting a transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the period offset.
  • the step of acquiring the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission specifically includes: acquiring a second reference The uplink-downlink ratio configuration determines a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission by the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration and the subframe of the uplink SPS transmission.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is an uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference And one of an uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference and an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with a minimum number of uplink subframes in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is an uplink in a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set acquired by the UE The TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the least number of sub-frames.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is fixed in the protocol Or pre-configured.
  • the second aspect provides a semi-persistent scheduling method, where the semi-persistent scheduling method includes: determining whether an uplink/downlink attribute of an SPS available subframe of the SPS transmission changes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes; If the uplink and downlink attributes change, the SPS transmission is ignored.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method further includes: determining whether the SPS transmission is an SPS new data transmission; if the SPS transmission is an SPS new data transmission Responding to the subsequent scheduling instructions to re-execute the ignored SPS new data transmission.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method further includes: delaying the SPS transmission to the SPS available subframe after the uplink and downlink attributes are changed The Wth SPS available subframe, or the SPS transmission is advanced to the Mth SPS available subframe before the SPS available subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes are changed, where W and M are respectively natural numbers.
  • a user equipment in a third aspect, includes a determining module and a first executing module, where: the determining module is configured to determine a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame, where the fixed subframe set is The uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes; the first execution module is configured to be in the fixed subframe set determined by the determining module The SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the determining module is configured to obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink ratios And configuring, determining, by the subframe that the uplink and downlink attributes remain unchanged in the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, to form the fixed subframe set.
  • the determining module is configured to obtain indication information, where the indication information directly specifies the subframe in the fixed subframe set.
  • the determining module is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, and the specific attribute in the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration
  • the subframes form the fixed subframe set.
  • the fixed subframe set is a fixed uplink subframe set and At least one of the fixed downlink subframe sets, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink subframes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, and the fixed downlink subframe set
  • the sub-frames are all downlink sub-frames when the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes;
  • the first execution module is configured to perform uplink SPS transmission on the fixed uplink subframe set, or Downlink SPS transmission is performed on the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the determining module is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, where the fixed uplink subframe set is formed by the uplink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, where the first The fixed downlink subframe set is formed by referring to the downlink subframe and the special subframe in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used to form the fixed uplink subframe set is different from the forming The first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used by the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the forming the first downlink reference used by the fixed downlink subframe set The line proportion configuration is the proportional configuration indicated by the first system information block.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration includes an uplink and downlink ratio of a downlink HARQ timing reference Configuring and uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, where the determining module is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, where the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference forms The fixed uplink subframe set, the downlink subframe and the special subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the uplink HARQ timing form the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the determining module is configured to obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink ratios Configuring, selecting, from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the same number of subframes with the same uplink and downlink attributes as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission, and transmitting the SPS by the selected uplink and downlink proportion configuration Subframes having the same transmission direction form the fixed subframe set.
  • the determining module is configured to: at least one of a system broadcast message and a dedicated RRC message A set of uplink and downlink proportion configurations for acquiring the TDD frame.
  • the user equipment further includes a second execution module, where The second execution module is configured to determine the fixed subframe set determined by the module The feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes of the combination are the same as the transmission direction of the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission.
  • the user equipment further includes an acquiring module, The acquiring module is configured to acquire an SPS control instruction from a subframe of the fixed subframe set determined by the determining module and a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the transmission control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, A combination of one or more of the SPS retransmission data block instructions and the SPS release instructions.
  • the acquiring module is configured to acquire an SPS control instruction from a subframe of the fixed subframe set determined by the determining module and a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the transmission control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, A combination of one or more of the SPS retransmission data block instructions and the SPS release instructions.
  • the subframe for acquiring the SPS control instruction is in the fixed subframe set A downlink subframe capable of scheduling SPS transmissions.
  • the first execution module is configured to acquire an uplink SPS The period offset of the transmission, and the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission is offset according to the period offset.
  • the first execution module is configured to obtain a second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, The second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration and the subframe of the uplink SPS transmission determine a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is an uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference And one of an uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference and an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with a minimum number of uplink subframes in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is an uplink in a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set acquired by the UE The TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the least number of sub-frames.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is fixed in the protocol Or pre-configured.
  • a user equipment in a fourth aspect, includes a determining module and a transmission control a module, wherein: the determining module is configured to determine whether an uplink/downlink attribute of an SPS available subframe of the SPS transmission changes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes; the transmission control module determines When the module determines that the uplink and downlink attributes change, the SPS transmission is ignored.
  • the determining module is further configured to determine whether the SPS transmission is an SPS new data transmission, and the transmission control module is further configured to perform the determining When the module determines that the SPS transmission is a SPS new data transmission, the module re-executes the ignored SPS new data transmission in response to the subsequent scheduling instruction.
  • the transmission control module is further configured to delay the SPS transmission to the SPS available subframe after the uplink and downlink attributes change The Wth SPS available subframes, or the SPS transmission is advanced to the Mth SPS available subframes before the SPS available subframes in which the uplink and downlink attributes are changed, where W and M are respectively natural numbers.
  • a user equipment in a fifth aspect, includes a memory and a processor, and the processor is electrically connected to the memory, where: the processor is configured to determine a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame, where The uplink and downlink attributes of each of the fixed subframe sets remain unchanged when the uplink-downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, and the uplink and downlink attributes and the SPS transmission in the fixed subframe set are The SPS transmission is performed on the subframes with the same transmission direction.
  • the processor is configured to acquire an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink The proportional configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and determines a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes remain unchanged in the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations to form the fixed subframe set.
  • the processor is configured to obtain indication information, where the indication information directly specifies the subframe in the fixed subframe set.
  • the processor is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, where the specific attribute in the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration
  • the subframe forms the fixed subframe set.
  • the fixed subframe set is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set, where the subframe in the fixed uplink subframe set is When the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, the uplink subframe is composed, and the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set is a downlink subframe when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the processor is further configured to perform uplink SPS transmission on the fixed uplink subframe set, or perform downlink SPS transmission on the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the processor is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, where the first reference is up and down
  • the uplink subframe in the row ratio configuration forms the fixed uplink subframe set
  • the fixed downlink subframe set is formed by the downlink subframe and the special subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used to form the fixed uplink subframe set is different from the forming The first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used by the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the forming the first downlink reference used by the fixed downlink subframe set The line proportion configuration is the proportional configuration indicated by the first system information block.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration includes an uplink and downlink ratio of a downlink HARQ timing reference Configuring and uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference
  • the processor is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration
  • the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the downlink HARQ timing forms the fixed uplink
  • the subframe set, the downlink subframe and the special subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the uplink HARQ timing form the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the processor is configured to obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations And selecting, from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the same number of subframes in which the uplink and downlink attributes are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission, and the transmission of the SPS transmission in the selected uplink and downlink proportion configuration Subframes of the same direction form the said Fixed subframe collection.
  • the processor by using at least one of a system broadcast message and a dedicated RRC message Obtaining an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame.
  • the processor is further used in the fixed The feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the frame set are the same as the transmission direction of the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission.
  • the processor is further configured to use the fixed Acquiring an SPS control instruction in a subframe of the subframe set that is the same as a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, an SPS retransmission data block instruction, and an SPS release instruction.
  • the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, an SPS retransmission data block instruction, and an SPS release instruction.
  • the subframe for acquiring the SPS control instruction is in the fixed subframe set A downlink subframe capable of scheduling SPS transmissions.
  • the processor is configured to acquire a period of uplink SPS transmission Offset, offsetting the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the period offset.
  • the processor is configured to acquire a second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, by using the second reference
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration and the subframe of the uplink SPS transmission determine a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is an uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference And one of an uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference and an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with a minimum number of uplink subframes in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is configured by the UE acquiring the TDD uplink and downlink The TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the least number of uplink subframes in the proportional configuration set.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is fixed in the protocol Or pre-configured.
  • a user equipment including a processor and a memory, and the processor is electrically connected to the memory, where: the processor is configured to dynamically change an uplink and downlink proportion configuration of a TDD frame. Determining whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes of the SPS transmission are changed, and omitting the SPS transmission when the uplink and downlink attributes change; the memory is configured to store the SPS available subframes for performing the SPS transmission. set.
  • the processor is further configured to determine whether the SPS transmission is an SPS new data transmission, where the SPS transmission is an SPS new data transmission, and the response Subsequent scheduling instructions re-execute the ignored SPS new data transmission.
  • the processor is further configured to delay the SPS transmission to the end of the SPS available subframe where the uplink and downlink attributes change W SPS available subframes, or advance the SPS transmission to the Mth SPS available subframe before the SPS available subframe where the uplink and downlink attributes change, where W and M are natural numbers, respectively.
  • the foregoing technical solution by determining a fixed subframe set, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink-downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, and the uplink and downlink in the fixed subframe set
  • the SPS transmission is performed on the same subframe as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission. In this way, the normal execution of the SPS during dynamic TDD uplink-downlink configuration can be realized.
  • the SPS is executed normally and the SPS performance is improved.
  • TDD frame 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a TDD frame
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a semi-persistent scheduling system of the present application
  • 3 is a flowchart of a first implementation manner of a semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application
  • 4 is a flowchart of a first solution of determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame in the first implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a third scheme for determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame in the first implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application;
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a fourth scheme for determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame in the first implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application;
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a second implementation manner of a semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of offsetting a transmission period of an uplink SPS transmission in a third implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a fourth implementation manner of a semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a fifth implementation manner of a semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a first embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a second implementation manner of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a third embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a first implementation manner of a base station according to the present application.
  • 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a second implementation manner of a base station according to the present application.
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth implementation manner of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a fifth implementation manner of a user equipment according to the present application. detailed description
  • the time domain in the system is composed of a radio frame.
  • SFN system frame number
  • one subframe is identified by the system frame number and the subframe number 3 ⁇ 4/ within each radio frame.
  • the subframes mentioned below, including the uplink subframe and the downlink subframe, are the same.
  • time resources are allocated in the uplink and downlink directions.
  • the TDD frame structure supports 7 different uplink and downlink time proportional allocations (that is, configuration 0 ⁇ 6). It can be configured according to the characteristics of the traffic.
  • the current TDD system supports seven kinds of uplink and downlink ratios.
  • the specific configuration of each uplink and downlink ratio is shown in Table 1:
  • U is represented as an uplink subframe
  • D is a downlink subframe
  • S is a special subframe, which is mainly used for downlink transmission.
  • a special subframe and a downlink subframe are collectively referred to as a downlink subframe.
  • the SPS is a semi-persistent scheduling mechanism.
  • the main method is to configure a set of SPS-related parameters for the UE through the RRC message.
  • the SPS is used as an example.
  • the configured parameters can include the SPS period and the conditions for implicitly releasing the uplink SPS.
  • the SPS is used as an example.
  • the configuration parameters may include the SPS period, the uplink feedback resource corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission, and the number of HARQ processes reserved for the SPS.
  • the SPS transmission resource is then activated by the SPS activation command, and the UE periodically uses the SPS transmission resource for SPS transmission according to the SPS activation command.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink configuration configured for the UE may change dynamically.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration changes, it is originally used for uplink transmission.
  • the transmitted uplink subframe may become a downlink subframe, or the downlink subframe originally used for downlink transmission becomes an uplink subframe.
  • the subframes 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 in a wireless LTE frame are up and down.
  • the row attributes are unchanged, where 0, 1, 5, and 6 are downlink subframes or special subframes, which may be referred to as a downlink subframe set or a fixed downlink subframe set, and 2, 3, 7, 8 are uplink subframes, which may be called The uplink subframe subset or the fixed uplink subframe set; the subframes 4 and 9 may be used as an uplink subframe or a downlink subframe, which is a flexible subframe, and may be referred to as a flexible subframe set.
  • the subframe 4 with the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configured to 0 is the uplink subframe, and the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration is 1 for the subframe. 4 is a downlink subframe.
  • the subframe 9 in which the TDD uplink and downlink ratio is configured to be 0 is an uplink subframe, and the uplink and downlink ratios of the TDD are set to 1, and the subframe 9 becomes a downlink subframe. This may cause the SPS data transmission to be affected.
  • the present application provides the following embodiments of the present invention.
  • the SPS can be normally transmitted without being affected by the flexible subframe.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a semi-persistent scheduling system of the present application.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling system of the present embodiment includes a base station 110 and one or more user equipments UE120, wherein the system of the base station 110 can be compatible at the same time.
  • UE 120, base station 110 can communicate with multiple UEs 120, respectively.
  • Parameter configuration can be performed for the UE 120 by the base station 110.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of a first embodiment of a semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • the method for performing the semi-persistent scheduling in this embodiment may include:
  • S101 Determine a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes;
  • the UE determines a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame according to the parameter information that has been configured for it.
  • the parameter information may be configured for the UE by using a base station or by using a protocol.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink-downlink ratio configurations, a downlink HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) timing reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and an uplink HARQ timing reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio. Configure one or more of the parameters such as the period in which the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration changes, and the time when the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change command is sent.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE is one or a combination of the parameter information of the uplink SPS and the parameter information of the downlink SPS.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE may further include a regular SPS configuration parameter.
  • the SPS configuration parameter may include a period of the SPS, a condition for implicitly releasing the uplink SPS, and the like.
  • the SPS configuration parameter may include a period of the SPS, an uplink feedback resource corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission, and a number of HARQ processes reserved for the SPS.
  • the parameter information of the uplink SPS may be notified only to the UE, or only the parameter information of the downlink SPS of the UE may be notified, or the parameter information of the uplink and downlink SPS of the UE may be notified at the same time.
  • the fixed subframe set here is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink sub-frames when the uplink-downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set is a downlink subframe when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set do not change when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically.
  • the uplink-downlink ratio configuration for TDD dynamically changes between ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
  • the subframes ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ under the ratio ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ are all descendants.
  • the frames, that is, ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ constitute a fixed downlink subframe set, and ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ are uplink subframes, that is, ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ constitute a fixed uplink subframe. set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportions of TDD are dynamically changed between ⁇ 1 , 2 ⁇ .
  • the subframes ⁇ 0, 1 , 5 , 9 ⁇ under the ratio ⁇ 1 , 2 ⁇ are all descending.
  • the subframes, that is, ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 9 ⁇ constitute a fixed downlink subframe set
  • ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ are uplink subframes, that is, ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ constitute a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a possible scheme 1 for determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame according to the embodiment.
  • the determining the fixed subframe set in the TDD frame includes the following steps:
  • S1011 Obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations;
  • the UE may obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • it can be the scale configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above, or ⁇ 1 , 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ and so on. That is, it may be a combination of any two or more of the uplink and downlink proportion configurations of Table 1 above.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol.
  • the base station eNB may not be required to notify the UE of the uplink and downlink ratio of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set may further include an uplink and downlink proportion configuration that is not in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in the foregoing Table 1, and is not limited in the present invention.
  • S1012 Determine a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes remain unchanged in at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations to form a fixed subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the obtained TDD frame it may be determined which subframes the fixed subframe set specifically includes in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) radio frame.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame configured for the UE is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above
  • the UE may determine the subframe ⁇ 0, 1 , 5 in one LTE radio frame.
  • 6 ⁇ is a downlink subframe, that is, a fixed downlink subframe set
  • ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • subframes ⁇ 4, 9 ⁇ in an LTE radio frame may be used for uplink transmission, they may also be used for downlink transmission as flexible subframes. Therefore, it is not used as a subframe of the fixed subframe set of the present embodiment. That is, in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , if the parameter information of the downlink SPS is configured for the UE, the UE determines that the SPS transmission can only use one of the ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ subframes or Multiple, and if the parameter information of the uplink SPS is configured for the UE, the UE determines that only one or more of the ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ subframes can be used for the SPS transmission.
  • the UE may determine that the ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 9 ⁇ is a downlink subframe, that is, a fixed downlink subframe set, in one LTE radio frame.
  • ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • the UE determines that the SPS transmission can only be one or more of the ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 9 ⁇ subframes, and for the uplink SPS, the UE determines that the SPS transmission only Can be one or two of the ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ sub-frames.
  • the UE acquires indication information, and the indication information directly specifies the subframe in the fixed subframe set. That is to say, the UE does not need to determine the fixed subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set, and directly adopts the subframe in the specified fixed subframe set for SPS transmission.
  • the subframes in the fixed subframe set specified herein may be one or more subframes in the fixed subframe set obtained by the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set. Specifying a fixed subframe set when configuring the downlink SPS for the UE
  • the subframe in the subframe may be one or more subframes in the fixed downlink subframe set obtained by the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set, and the uplink SPS is similar.
  • the UE may acquire the indication information through a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above
  • the subframes ⁇ 0, 1 , 5, 6 ⁇ are downlink in one LTE radio frame.
  • the subframe, that is, the fixed downlink subframe set, ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • the indication information may directly specify that the subframe in the fixed subframe set is one or more subframes of ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , or ⁇ 0, 5 ⁇ , or ⁇ 0, 1 , 6 ⁇ , etc.
  • the indication information may directly specify that the subframe of the fixed subframe set is one or more subframes of ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 3, 8 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 7, 8 ⁇ , etc.
  • the configuration set is similar. This embodiment is not-exemplary.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a possible scheme 3 for determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame according to the embodiment.
  • the solution determining the fixed subframe set in the TDD frame includes the following steps:
  • S1021 Acquire at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be one or more, and the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the uplink or downlink SPS reference may be different.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may include at least one of a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the uplink and downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the downlink HARQ. Timing reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the UE may obtain the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink SPS reference may be notified to the UE through the SIB1 (System Information Block 1).
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration in the SIB1.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration referenced by the uplink SPS transmission of the UE may be In this case, the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be fixed or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE.
  • S1022 Form a fixed subframe set by a subframe of a specific attribute in the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • a fixed subframe set is formed by a subframe of a specific attribute in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the fixed subframe set is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the uplink subframes in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the uplink SPS form a fixed uplink subframe set, and for the downlink SPS, the downlink SPS is configured.
  • the downlink subframes in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the SPS reference form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the uplink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration forms a fixed uplink subframe set
  • the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink and downlink.
  • the dynamic configuration of the proportional configuration is an uplink subframe
  • the downlink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration forms a fixed downlink subframe set
  • the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set dynamically changes when the uplink-downlink ratio configuration changes dynamically. Both are downlink subframes.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and the uplink and downlink ratio of the uplink HARQ timing reference is configured to be 0.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink ratio configuration may be 0, the UE may determine that the downlink subframes ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ for the downlink SPS form a fixed downlink subframe set according to the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration 0 (according to the above table 1, the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration is 0.
  • the ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ subframe is a downlink subframe).
  • the UE may perform SPS transmission using one or more of the ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ subframes in one LTE radio frame. If the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , the uplink and downlink ratio of the downlink HARQ timing reference is configured to be 1, and if the uplink SPS parameter information is configured for the UE, the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be 1 .
  • the UE may determine, according to the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration 1, that the uplink subframes for the uplink SPS ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ form a fixed downlink subframe set (according to the above table 1, the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration 1
  • the ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ subframe is an uplink subframe). That is, in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration 1, the UE may perform SPS transmission using one or more of the ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ subframes in one LTE radio frame.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and the downlink HARQ timing parameter
  • the uplink/downlink ratio of the test is configured as 2, and if the uplink SPS parameter information is configured for the UE, the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be 2, and the UE may determine the uplink for the uplink SPS according to the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration 2.
  • the subframe ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ forms a fixed downlink subframe set (according to the above table 1, the ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ subframe of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration 2 is an uplink subframe). That is, in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration 2, the UE may perform SPS transmission using one or more of the ⁇ 2, 7 ⁇ subframes in one LTE radio frame.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a fourth solution for determining a fixed subframe set in a TDD frame according to the embodiment.
  • the solution determining the fixed subframe set in the TDD frame includes the following steps:
  • S1031 Acquire an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations;
  • the UE may obtain a set of uplink and downlink proportion configurations of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, and the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • it can be the scale configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1, or ⁇ 1 , 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ and so on. That is, it may be a combination of any two or more of the uplink and downlink proportion configurations of Table 1 above, or may also include an uplink and downlink proportion configuration that is not in the above Table 1.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol. In this case, the eNB may not be required to notify the UE of the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message. set
  • S1032 Select an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the least number of subframes with the same uplink and downlink attributes as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission from at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and select the same uplink and downlink ratio configuration as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • Subframes form a fixed set of subframes.
  • the UE may select the uplink and downlink attributes from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations that are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission according to the indication information of the uplink and downlink ratio configuration in which the uplink and downlink attributes are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the smallest number of subframes determines that the subframes having the same transmission direction as the SPS transmission form a fixed subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the smallest number of downlink subframes is selected from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and the downlink subframes obtained by the uplink and downlink ratio configuration form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇
  • the number of downlink subframes (including special subframes) in one LTE radio frame in the TDD uplink-downlink configuration 0 is the least.
  • the line proportion configuration is 0 for ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇
  • the uplink and downlink ratio configuration is 1 for ⁇ 0, 1, 4, 5, 6, 9 ⁇ )
  • the UE downlink SPS transmission can use TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the downlink subframe in 0.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 1 , 2 ⁇ , it can be seen from Table 1 that the downlink subframe in one LTE radio frame in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration 1 is the least, and the downlink SPS transmission of the UE can be used in the uplink and downlink configuration.
  • the UE may refer to the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the least number of uplink subframes in the next LTE radio frame in the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration set. It is assumed that the TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration set is the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration in Table 1 above.
  • the number of uplink subframes in an LTE radio frame in the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration 1 is the least (the uplink-downlink ratio configuration 0 is ⁇ 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9).
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration 1 is ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ )
  • the UE uplink SPS transmission can use the uplink subframe in the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration 1. For other uplink and downlink proportion configuration sets, and so on.
  • S102 Perform SPS transmission on a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the uplink SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in the fixed uplink subframe set, or the downlink SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the configuration of the TDD uplink and downlink proportions is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 as an example, and it is assumed that the fixed subframe set is determined by the above scheme 1. It is assumed that the downlink SPS is configured, the SPS period is 20ms (the length of one subframe is 1ms), and the time at which the SPS transmission is activated is 0, and the time at which the UE performs downlink SPS transmission is 0, 20, 40. That is, the UE performs SPS transmission on the corresponding downlink subframes ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ at 0, 20, 40.... respectively.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present embodiment may further include: acquiring an SPS control instruction from a subframe in a fixed subframe set that is the same as a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, and the SPS newly transmits data.
  • the SPS control instruction may instruct the UE to perform a combination of one or more of physical resources, modulation and coding modes, SPS transmission times, and the like used for SPS transmission.
  • the subframe used to obtain the SPS control instruction is a fixed subframe set. It is sufficient to schedule the downlink subframe of the SPS transmission. Specifically, the acquiring the SPS control command from the subframe in the fixed subframe set that is the same as the transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, the UE receives the PDCCH control command masked by the SPS C-RNTI in the subframe.
  • the SPS control instruction is the SPS activation command.
  • the UE acquires the SPS activation command from the same subframe in the transmission direction of the SPS activation command to activate the subframe for SPS transmission.
  • the SPS activation commands of the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS can only be obtained from the downlink subframe.
  • the SPS activation instruction for each subframe can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe in which the subframe can be scheduled.
  • the downlink scheduling command transmission and the downlink data transmission are in the same subframe, that is, the downlink SPS activation command may activate the downlink SPS transmission in the subframe in which the SPS activation command is transmitted, and the subsequent SPS transmission may occur periodically.
  • the SPS activation command can only be transmitted on the downlink subframes in which the corresponding uplink subframes can be scheduled.
  • the uplink scheduling command transmits K subframes before the uplink data transmission, where the K value is different according to different TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations. For example, K can be 4, 6, etc.
  • the SPS activation command of the subframe 2 can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame (
  • the sixth downlink subframe before subframe 2 is the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame.
  • the SPS activation command for the downlink subframe 1 with the uplink-downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ and the data transmitted by the downlink subframe 1 are both transmitted on the downlink subframe 1, and the SPS activation command of the downlink subframe 5 and the downlink subframe are adopted. 5
  • the transmitted data is transmitted on the downlink subframe 5. So on and so forth.
  • the SPS activation command is only monitored at the time when the SPS activation command can be transmitted, or the UE does not listen to the SPS activation instruction at other times, or the UE ignores the SPS activation instruction after listening to the SPS activation instruction at other times.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in the above Table 1 as an example. If the fixed subframe set is determined by the foregoing scheme 1, the time of the downlink SPS transmission may be ⁇ 0. , 1 , 5 , 6 ⁇ subframes, the downlink SPS activation command can only be transmitted in ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ subframes in one LTE radio frame, or not in other subframes.
  • the SPS activation instruction for the activated subframe, if the SPS activation command is received again, the SPS activation instruction can also be regarded as an SPS modification instruction.
  • the resource allocated by the SPS activation instruction may be released by receiving the SPS scheduling instruction, for scheduling of subsequent data, and avoiding resources. Waste.
  • the SPS scheduling instruction when used to indicate the SPS release, it may be referred to as an SPS release instruction.
  • the SPS release command may be transmitted on a downlink subframe capable of scheduling a corresponding subframe.
  • the SPS release command can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe that can schedule the corresponding uplink subframe.
  • the SPS release command of the uplink subframe 2 with the uplink and downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ uplink SPS if K is 6, then the SPS release command of the subframe 2 can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame ( The sixth downlink subframe before subframe 2 is the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame.
  • the SPS release command of the downlink subframe 1 with the uplink-downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ is transmitted on the downlink subframe 1, and the SPS release command of the downlink subframe 5 is transmitted on the downlink subframe 5. So on and so forth.
  • the SPS release command may also be transmitted at the time of the SPS transmission that can be scheduled for actual use.
  • the above downlink proportion configuration set is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ as an example. It is assumed that the fixed subframe set is determined by the foregoing manner 1.
  • the parameter information of the downlink SPS is configured, and the SPS period is 20 ms (the length of the subframe is 1 ms). If the time when the SPS transmission is activated is 0, the time when the UE performs the downlink SPS transmission is 0, 20, 40...., then the SPS release command can be transmitted at the SPS transmission time that can be scheduled to be actually used, such as 20, 40. .
  • the SPS activation command may be not limited to the fixed downlink subframe, but may be in any downlink subframe, including fixed.
  • the subframe and the flexible subframe are transmitted, so the SPS activation command may indicate that the SPS transmission is performed on the next available subframe.
  • the eNB may send an SPS activation instruction multiple times to improve the reliability of the SPS activation instruction.
  • the UE may apply any one of the SPS activation instructions. Specifically, the UE may ignore or discard the same SPS activation command received later. Similarly, SPS release instructions can be similarly processed.
  • the SPS transmission may include uplink or downlink SPS new data transmission, uplink or downlink SPS retransmission data transmission, or SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction may include an uplink or downlink SPS activation command, an uplink or downlink SPS new command.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method determines the uplink and downlink proportions of the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set in the TDD frame by determining the fixed subframe set.
  • the SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the normal execution of the SPS during the dynamic uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD can be implemented, the SPS performance is prompted, and the complexity of the UE performing the SPS is reduced.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a second embodiment of the present application semi-persistent scheduling method.
  • the present embodiment is described by using a UE as an execution host.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method in this embodiment includes the following steps:
  • S201 Determine a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically;
  • the UE determines a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame according to the parameter information already configured for the UE.
  • the parameter information can be configured for the UE through a base station or a protocol.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, and a period of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change.
  • One or more of the parameters such as the timing of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change instruction.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE is one or a combination of the parameter information of the uplink SPS and the parameter information of the downlink SPS.
  • a possible implementation for determining a fixed set of subframes in a TDD frame is the same as the four possible implementations provided by the above embodiments.
  • the fixed downlink subframe set of the downlink feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission may be composed of the fixed downlink subframes in the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the fixed uplink subframe set of the uplink feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission may be composed of the fixed uplink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the referenced TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration described in the foregoing embodiment, or may not be.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced herein may be at least one of a TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and a TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference may be used, and the feedback corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission is configured for the UE.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference can be used.
  • the eNB may notify the UE of the above-mentioned TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission of the UE may be the TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration notified in the SIB1.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink proportion referenced by the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission is pre-configured or fixedly configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission of the UE may be a pre-configured TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration such as 2, 5, and at this time, the TDD corresponding to the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission is up and down.
  • the line proportion configuration information may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE at this time.
  • S202 Perform feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are the same as the transmission direction of the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission.
  • the feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in the fixed uplink subframe set, or the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method of this embodiment may further include: acquiring an SPS control instruction from a subframe in a fixed subframe set that is the same as a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, and an SPS new transmission data block instruction.
  • the SPS control instruction may instruct the UE to perform a combination of one or more of physical resources, modulation and coding modes, SPS transmission times, and the like used by the SPS transmission.
  • the subframe used to acquire the SPS control instruction is a downlink subframe in the fixed subframe set capable of scheduling SPS transmission.
  • the UE receives the PDCCH control instruction masked by the SPS C-RNTI on the subframe.
  • the specific implementation process is the same as that of the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first implementation manner and the second implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application may be combined with each other, that is, the SPS transmission and the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS may be used in the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • the uplink SPS may have an offset in the TDD uplink-downlink configuration.
  • T [ ( 10 X S+Q ) + NXC] + VX ( N mod 2 ) ] mod 10240 (Formula 1)
  • T represents the time of SPS transmission and S represents the radio frame of the first SPS transmission after activation of SPS transmission
  • No. Q indicates the subframe number for the first SPS transmission after the SPS transmission is activated.
  • C denotes a period
  • V denotes an offset
  • mod is a modulus
  • N mod 2 denotes the meaning of dividing N by 2
  • mod 10240 is for normalization.
  • the period C of the uplink SPS is 10 ms
  • the time Q of the uplink SPS transmission is the subframe 2
  • the default is from the 0th radio frame, that is, S is 0, and the TDD uplink and downlink proportion is set to 1
  • the shift amount V is 1, and the first time of the activation time starts to be the 0th cycle
  • the time for other transmissions after the start of the activation time is also calculated according to the above formula. According to the above formula, it can be calculated that the SPS transmission starts from the activation time, and the time of each transmission occurs: 2, 13, 22, 33, ....
  • the offset of the period may be different.
  • the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission may be offset in order to adapt to the dynamic change of the uplink and downlink proportions of the TDD.
  • a method for offsetting the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission is further provided.
  • By offsetting the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission it is possible to effectively avoid the conflict between the SPS new data transmission and the retransmission data in the same frame.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of offsetting a transmission period of an uplink SPS transmission in a third implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application, including the following steps:
  • the obtaining the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission may be specifically obtained by acquiring a second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and determining, by the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration and the specific subframe for uplink SPS transmission.
  • the period offset of the uplink SPS transmission of the subframe For example, the acquired second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is 1 , and the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission for subframe 2 is 1 as shown in the above table 2. Or the obtained second reference uplink-downlink ratio is configured as 3, and the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission for the subframe 4 is known as -2 from the above table 2.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink configuration may be the same as the first reference uplink-downlink configuration mentioned in the foregoing embodiment, or may be different.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the downlink in the parameter information configured for the UE.
  • One of the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the HARQ timing reference, the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, and the uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the smallest number of uplink subframes in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be used.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration can be widely Broadcast messages or RRC messages or other messages are configured.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be a pre-configured TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol. UE.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink configuration may be a TDD uplink-downlink configuration with a minimum number of uplink subframes in one LTE frame in the TDD uplink-downlink ratio set configured by the UE.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above.
  • the number of uplink subframes in one LTE radio frame is the smallest in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of TDD, and the ratio of the second reference uplink and downlink is set to 1.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be configured by a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE.
  • obtaining the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission may also be specifically obtained by acquiring specific information of the offset, for example, by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message, which specific subframe or subframes to use or What offset information is available.
  • the UE performs a periodic offset based on this configuration information.
  • the specific information may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE at this time.
  • S3012 Offset the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the period offset.
  • the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission is offset according to the period offset. According to the offset and the above formula 1, the specific time of the uplink SPS transmission after the transmission period offset can be calculated, and the new data transmission is performed at the specific time obtained by the calculation.
  • the uplink SPS period C is 10 ms
  • the uplink SPS transmission activation time Q is subframe 2
  • TDD uplink and downlink proportion is set to 1 sub-frame 2 offset V is 1 , then according to the above formula
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion is configured to be 1
  • the uplink SPS period C is 10 ms
  • the uplink SPS transmission activation time Q is subframe 3
  • the default is from the 0th radio frame, that is, S is 0,
  • the offset V of the subframe 3 with the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configured to 1 is -1, according to the above formula
  • the embodiment of the present application can determine the SPS period offset of an uplink subframe by using a fixed second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and offset the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the SPS period offset. Therefore, it is effective to avoid conflicts between SPS new data transmission and retransmission data in the same ⁇ .
  • the method for offsetting the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission in this embodiment may be used alone, or may be applied to the first or second implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method, or the first and second embodiments may be combined. In the embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a fourth implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • the implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method includes:
  • the base station configures, for the UE, parameter information that can determine a fixed subframe set, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes;
  • the parameter information configured by the base station for the UE includes the indication information, and further includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference, a period of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change, and a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • One or more of the parameters such as the time at which the instruction is changed.
  • the indication information is used to indicate, in what manner, the UE determines a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame. This embodiment provides the following possible situations in which the base station notifies the indication information of the UE:
  • the indication information notified by the base station to the UE is that the set of fixed subframes is determined by using the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the UE obtains a fixed uplink subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD, and the uplink and downlink proportions of the TDD frame are dynamically changed when the uplink and downlink proportions of the TDD frame are dynamically changed. Forming a fixed downlink subframe set for the subframe of the downlink subframe.
  • the indication information that the base station notifies the UE is a fixed subframe set directly designated by the configured indication information.
  • the base station determines one or more subsets of the fixed subframe set or the fixed subframe set according to the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE.
  • Specify the fixer directly by the instruction information A sub-frame in a frame set. For example, if the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , the subframe ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ is a downlink subframe or a special subframe in an LTE radio frame, that is, a fixed downlink sub-frame.
  • the frame subset, ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe subset.
  • the base station may directly specify, by using the indication information, that the fixed subframe set may be a set of one or more subframes in ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ or ⁇ 1 , 5, 6 ⁇ , etc.
  • the base station may directly specify that the fixed subframe set may be ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ by using the indication information.
  • the base station notifies the UE that the indication information is the reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration to determine the fixed subframe set.
  • the base station notifies the UE to indicate the information, and also configures at least one reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration for the UE.
  • the UE determines the fixed subframe set by using the referenced TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS can be configured with different reference TDD uplink and downlink proportions, or the same reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the uplink SPS may form a fixed uplink subframe set by using the uplink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink configuration, and the downlink SPS may use the downlink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink configuration to form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration may include at least one of a downlink-proportional configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and an uplink-downlink ratio configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference is used.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference is used.
  • the base station informs the UE to determine the fixed subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in which the uplink and downlink attributes of the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set have the same number of subframes as the SPS transmission.
  • the base station may configure a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set for the UE, so that the UE finds the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the same subframe with the same uplink and downlink attributes and the same SPS transmission direction according to the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the parameter information configured by the foregoing base station for the UE may be notified to the UE through a system broadcast message, or may be notified by a dedicated RRC message, such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message, or a combination of the two. That is, some parameter information is notified to the UE through the system broadcast message, and another part of the parameter is The number information is notified to the UE by a dedicated RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message. When some or all of the parameter information is notified to the UE through a dedicated RRC message, the UE may send an RRC Complete message to the base station.
  • a dedicated RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a fifth implementation manner of the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present application.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method of this embodiment includes the following steps:
  • S401 The uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • S402 It is determined whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes of the SPS transmission are changed.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically, it is determined whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes for performing the SPS transmission also change. For example, the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of TDD dynamically changes between ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
  • the subframes ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ are all downlink subframes
  • subframes ⁇ 2, 3 , 7, 8 ⁇ are all uplink subframes
  • the uplink subframe when the TDD uplink-downlink ratio is configured to 0 becomes the downlink subframe when the uplink-downlink ratio is set to 1
  • the subframe 9 is determined by the TDD uplink-downlink ratio.
  • the uplink subframe when the configuration is 0 becomes the downlink subframe when the uplink-downlink ratio is set to 1.
  • S403 Ignore the SPS transmission.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method of this embodiment may further include: determining whether the ignored SPS transmission is a new data transmission, and further responding to the subsequent scheduling instruction when determining that the ignored SPS transmission is a new data transmission. Re-execute the ignored SPS new data transfer.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method of this embodiment may further include delaying the ignored SPS transmission to the Wth SPS available subframe after the SPS available subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes are changed, or The SPS transmits the Mth available SPS available before the SPS available subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes change, where W and M are natural numbers, respectively.
  • the W and the M may be configured through an RRC message, or pre-configured in advance.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
  • a certain uplink SPS transmission of the UE is subframe 4, then when the ratio is changed to 1,
  • the downlink is similar and will not be described again.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame is dynamically changed, it is determined whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes of the SPS transmission are changed, and the uplink and downlink attributes are ignored when the uplink and downlink attributes change. SPS transmission on a changed subframe. In this manner, a method for processing SPS data transmission when the uplink and downlink attributes of some available subframes for performing SPS transmission also change due to changes in the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration is provided.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method of the present embodiment further provides a processing manner for the ignored SPS transmission, that is, when the ignored SPS transmission is the SPS new data transmission, further retransmitting the ignored SPS transmission in response to the subsequent scheduling instruction, thereby It is possible to ensure that data in the new SPS data transmission is ignored.
  • transmission can be performed by delaying the ignored SPS transmission to one of the available available subframes or advancing to some of the previous available subframes. In this way, data loss due to changes in the uplink and downlink attributes of the subframe can be effectively avoided, and the SPS transmission performance and reliability are improved.
  • the current research also finds that the interference between the UE in the fixed uplink subframe and the interference of the UE in the flexible upper and lower subframes are very different.
  • the power headroom is reported to the base station, which is called a power headroom report.
  • the PHR is used to report the difference between the maximum transmit power of the terminal and the estimated uplink transmit power to the base station, so that the base station performs power control and uplink scheduling on the terminal according to the reported power headroom.
  • the triggering of the PHR report mainly includes the following situations: 1.
  • the periodic PHR timer expires; 2. It is forbidden to report the PHR timer expires or times out, and the path loss changes after the last PHR report exceeds a certain threshold. 3, uplink secondary carrier activation, and so on.
  • the parameter configuration of the PHR may include a periodic PHR timer (Regular PHR-Timer), and it is prohibited to report three RRC configuration parameters: a PHR timer (Prohibit PHR-Timer) and a downlink path loss change (dl-Pathloss Change).
  • the triggering condition of the PHR reported in the prior art is that the terminal reports the PHR of the fixed subframe that is sent by the terminal according to the static configuration of the TDD matching information of the cell, and the obtained information has certain limitations, so the base station is The scenario in which the cell dynamically configures the TDD matching information may require a new PHR reporting triggering method and reporting, so that the base station performs uplink scheduling more accurately.
  • the solution of the embodiment of the present invention includes: in the dynamic TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration, we can set different PHR parameter sets for different subframe sets.
  • Step 501 The UE receives the first PHR parameter and the second PHR parameter, where the first PHR parameter includes at least one of a first period PHR timer, a first forbidden reporting PHR timer, and a first downlink path loss variation.
  • the first PHR parameter is applied to a fixed subframe set.
  • the second PHR parameter includes at least one of a second period PHR timer, a second forbidden reporting PHR timer, and a second downlink path loss variation, and the second PHR parameter is applied to the flexible subframe set.
  • the first PHR parameter and the second PHR parameter may be that the base station is notified to the UE by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, or is pre-configured, which is not limited herein.
  • the UE receives the third PHR parameter, where the third parameter includes at least one of a third period PHR timer, a third prohibition reporting PHR timer, and a third downlink path loss variation.
  • the third PHR parameter is a parameter that is not included in the first PHR parameter and the second PHR parameter.
  • the third PHR parameter may be applied to the PHR of the fixed subframe set in combination with the first PHR parameter, and the third PHR parameter may also be applied to the PHR of the flexible subframe set in combination with the second PHR parameter. That is, the PHR of the fixed subframe set and the PHR of the flexible subframe set may partially adopt their respective PHR parameters while the other part simultaneously refers to the third PHR parameter.
  • the third PHR parameter may be that the base station is notified to the UE by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, or is pre-configured, and is not limited herein.
  • Step 502 The UE applies the received first PHR parameter and the second PHR parameter to trigger a PUR of a fixed subframe set and/or a flexible subframe set.
  • the PHR of the fixed subframe set is triggered, and after the PHR of the fixed subframe set is sent, the first period PHR timer is started again;
  • the second period PHR timer expires, the PHR of the flexible subframe set is triggered, and after the PHR of the flexible subframe set is sent, the second period PHR timer is started again.
  • the third PHR parameter received by the UE application triggers the PHR of the fixed subframe set and/or the flexible subframe set respectively.
  • the PHR of the trigger fixed subframe set and/or the flexible subframe set is the value of the third downlink path loss change amount. reference.
  • the third PHR parameter includes a third period PHR timer
  • the PHR of the trigger fixed subframe set and/or the flexible subframe set are all referenced by the value of the third period PHR timer.
  • the PHR of the fixed subframe set and/or the flexible subframe set can be triggered in time, thereby more effectively assisting the base station scheduling.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a first embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • the user equipment 100 of this embodiment includes a determining module 11 and a first executing module 12, where: the determining module 11 is configured to determine a TDD frame.
  • the determining module 11 determines a fixed set of subframes in the TDD frame based on the parameter information that has been configured for it.
  • the parameter information can be configured for the UE through a base station or protocol.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink-downlink ratio configurations, a downlink HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) timing reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and an uplink HARQ timing reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE is one or a combination of the parameter information of the uplink SPS and the parameter information of the downlink SPS.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE may further include a regular SPS configuration parameter.
  • the SPS configuration parameter may include a period of the SPS, a condition for implicitly releasing the uplink SPS, and the like.
  • the SPS configuration parameter may include a period of the SPS, an uplink feedback resource corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission, and a number of HARQ processes reserved for the SPS.
  • the parameter information of the uplink SPS may be notified only to the UE, or only the parameter information of the downlink SPS of the UE may be notified, or the parameter information of the uplink and downlink SPS of the UE may be notified at the same time.
  • the fixed subframe set here is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink sub-frames when the uplink-downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set is a downlink subframe when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set do not change when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically.
  • the present embodiment provides that the determining module 11 determines that there are four possible implementations of the fixed subframe set in the TDD frame:
  • the determining module 11 is configured to obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and the uplink and downlink attributes are determined to remain unchanged in at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • the changed subframes form a fixed set of subframes.
  • the determining module 11 can obtain the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, and the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol.
  • the eNB may not need to notify the UE of the uplink and downlink ratio of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set may further include an uplink and downlink ratio configuration that is not in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in the foregoing Table 1, and is not limited in the present invention.
  • the determining module 11 determines, according to the set of uplink and downlink proportions of the acquired TDD frame, that the fixed subframe set is in a specific packet of a Long Term Evolution (LTE) radio frame. Which sub-frames are included. For example, if the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame configured for the UE is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above, the UE may determine the subframe ⁇ 0, 1, 5 in one LTE radio frame. 6 ⁇ is a downlink subframe, that is, a fixed downlink subframe set, and ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • subframes ⁇ 4, 9 ⁇ in an LTE radio frame may be used for uplink transmission, they may also be used for downlink transmission as flexible subframes. Therefore, it is not used as a subframe of a fixed subframe set of the embodiment. That is, in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , if the parameter information of the downlink SPS is configured for the UE, the UE determines that the SPS transmission can only use one of the ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ subframes or Multiple, and if the parameter information of the uplink SPS is configured for the UE, the UE determines that only one or more of the ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ subframes can be used for the SPS transmission.
  • the determining module 11 is configured to obtain indication information, where the indication information directly specifies a subframe in the fixed subframe set.
  • the determining module 11 obtains indication information that directly specifies the subframes in the fixed subframe set. That is to say, the UE does not need to determine the fixed subframe set through the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set, and directly adopts the subframe in the specified fixed subframe set for SPS transmission.
  • the subframes in the fixed subframe set specified herein may be one or more subframes in the fixed subframe set obtained by the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the subframe in the fixed subframe set may be one or more subframes in the fixed downlink subframe set obtained by configuring the TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration set, and the uplink SPS is similar.
  • the UE may acquire the indication information through a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above
  • the subframes ⁇ 0, 1 , 5, 6 ⁇ are downlink in one LTE radio frame.
  • the subframe, that is, the fixed downlink subframe set, ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • the indication information may directly indicate that the subframe in the fixed subframe set is one or more subframes of ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , or ⁇ 0, 5 ⁇ , or ⁇ 0, 1 , 6 ⁇ , etc.
  • the indication information may directly specify that the subframe of the fixed subframe set is one or more subframes of ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 3, 8 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 7, 8 ⁇ , etc.
  • the determining module 11 is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, and form a fixed subframe set by the subframe of the specific attribute in the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the fixed subframe set is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink subframes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the subframes in the fixed downlink subframe set are all downlink subframes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the determining module 11 is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, and the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be one or more.
  • the first reference uplink ratio configuration of the uplink SPS reference is different from the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink SPS reference.
  • the uplink subframes in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the uplink SPS form a fixed uplink subframe set, and for the downlink SPS, the downlink SPS is configured.
  • the downlink subframes in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the SPS reference form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the fixed uplink subframe set is formed by the uplink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and is configured by the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the downlink subframe and the special subframe form the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used to form the fixed downlink subframe set is
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration in the SIB1.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may include at least one of a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the uplink and downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the downlink HARQ. Timing reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the determining module 11 is configured to obtain at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, if, for the uplink SPS, the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the downlink HARQ timing forms a fixed uplink subframe set, if for the downlink SPS
  • the downlink subframe and the special subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the uplink HARQ timing form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the UE uplink SPS transmission may be a pre-configured uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol.
  • the eNB may not be required to notify the UE.
  • the determining module 11 is configured to obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame.
  • the uplink-downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink-downlink ratio configurations, and selects an uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the least number of subframes in which the uplink and downlink attributes are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission from at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and is selected by the selected
  • the subframes in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration that are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission form a fixed subframe set.
  • the determining module 11 can obtain the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, and the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set can be the scale configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1, or ⁇ 1 , 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ and so on. That is, it may be a combination of any two or more of the uplink and downlink proportion configurations of Table 1 above, or may also include an uplink and downlink proportion configuration that is not in the above Table 1.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol. In this case, the eNB may not need to notify the UE of the uplink and downlink proportion of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message. Configure the collection.
  • the determining module 11 may select the uplink and downlink attributes and the SPS transmission transmission from the obtained at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations according to the indication information of the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in which the number of uplink and downlink attributes is the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the smallest number of subframes in the same direction determines that the subframes having the same transmission direction as the SPS transmission form a fixed subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportions with the least number of downlink subframes are selected from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and the downlink subframes obtained by the uplink and downlink ratio configuration form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink ratio configurations with the least number of uplink subframes are selected from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and the uplink subframes obtained by the uplink and downlink ratio configuration form a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • the first execution module 12 is configured to perform SPS transmission on a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set determined by the module 11 are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the first execution module 12 performs uplink SPS transmission on a subframe in the fixed uplink subframe set, or performs downlink SPS transmission on a subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set is the example of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in the above Table 1, and it is assumed that the fixed subframe set is determined by the above scheme 1. It is assumed that the downlink SPS is configured, the SPS period is 20 ms (the length of the subframe is lms), and the time at which the SPS transmission is activated is 0, and the time at which the UE performs the downlink SPS transmission is 0, 20, 40, .
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a second embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • the user equipment 200 of the present embodiment includes a determining module 21, a first executing module 22, an obtaining module 23, and a second executing module 23. , among them:
  • the determining module 21 is configured to determine a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically;
  • the first execution module 22 is configured to perform SPS transmission on a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set determined by the module are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the specific implementation process of the function of the determining module 21 and the first executing module 22 is the same as the implementation process of the corresponding module in the first embodiment of the user equipment of the present application. For details, refer to the detailed description of the embodiment shown in FIG. Let me repeat.
  • the user equipment of this embodiment further includes an obtaining module 23, configured to acquire an SPS control instruction from a subframe of a fixed subframe set determined by the determining module 21 and a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes the SPS A combination of one or more of an activation instruction, an SPS new transport data block instruction, an SPS retransmission data block instruction, and an SPS release instruction.
  • the user equipment of this embodiment may further acquire an SPS control instruction by using the acquisition module 23 from a subframe of the fixed subframe set with the same transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, and the SPS new transmission data block.
  • the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, and the SPS new transmission data block.
  • the SPS control instruction may indicate a combination of one or more of a physical resource, a modulation and coding mode, an SPS transmission time, and the like used by the UE for SPS transmission.
  • the subframe used for acquiring the SPS control instruction is a downlink subframe in the fixed subframe set capable of scheduling SPS transmission. Specifically, the obtaining, by the SPS control instruction, from the subframe in the fixed subframe set that is the same as the transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, the UE receives the PDCCH control instruction masked by the SPS C-RNTI on the subframe.
  • the SPS control instruction is the SPS activation command.
  • the acquisition module 23 acquires an SPS activation command from the same subframe in which the SPS activation instruction is transmitted, thereby activating the subframe for SPS transmission.
  • the SPS activation commands of the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS can only be obtained from the downlink subframe.
  • the SPS activation instruction for each subframe can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe in which the subframe can be scheduled.
  • the downlink scheduling command transmission and the downlink data transmission are in the same subframe, that is, the downlink SPS activation instruction may activate the downlink SPS transmission in the subframe in which the SPS activation instruction is transmitted, and the subsequent SPS transmission may occur periodically.
  • the SPS activation command can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe in which the corresponding uplink subframe can be scheduled.
  • the uplink scheduling command transmits K subframes before the uplink data transmission, where the K value is different according to different TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations. For example, K can be 4, 6, etc.
  • the acquisition module 23 only listens for the SPS activation instruction at the time when the SPS activation instruction can transmit, or the UE does not listen to the SPS activation instruction at other times, or the UE ignores the SPS after listening to the SPS activation instruction at other times.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration set is the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in the above Table 1 as an example. If the fixed subframe set is determined by the foregoing scheme 1, the time of the downlink SPS transmission may be ⁇ 0. , 1 , 5 , 6 ⁇ subframes, the downlink SPS activation command can only be transmitted in ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ subframes in one LTE radio frame, or not in other subframes.
  • the SPS activation instruction for the activated subframe, if the SPS activation command is received again, the SPS activation instruction can also be regarded as an SPS modification instruction.
  • the resources allocated by the SPS activation instruction can be released by receiving the SPS scheduling instruction for scheduling of subsequent data, thereby avoiding waste of resources.
  • the SPS scheduling instruction acquired by the obtaining module 23 is used to indicate the SPS release, it may be referred to as an SPS release instruction.
  • the SPS release command may be transmitted on a downlink subframe capable of scheduling a corresponding subframe.
  • the SPS release command can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe that can schedule the corresponding uplink subframe.
  • the SPS release command of the uplink subframe 2 with the uplink and downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ uplink SPS if K is 6, then the SPS release command of the subframe 2 can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame ( The sixth downlink subframe before subframe 2 is the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame.
  • the SPS release command of the downlink subframe 1 with the uplink-downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ is transmitted on the downlink subframe 1, and the SPS release command of the downlink subframe 5 is transmitted on the downlink subframe 5. So on and so forth.
  • the SPS release command may also be transmitted at an SPS transmission time that can be scheduled for actual use.
  • the above downlink proportion configuration set is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ as an example. It is assumed that the fixed subframe set is determined by the foregoing manner 1.
  • the parameter information of the downlink SPS is configured, and the SPS period is 20 ms (the length of the subframe is 1 ms).
  • the SPS release command can be transmitted at the SPS transmission time that can be scheduled to be actually used, such as 20, 40.
  • the SPS activation command may be not limited to the fixed downlink subframe, but may be in any downlink subframe, including fixed.
  • the subframe and the flexible subframe are transmitted, so the SPS activation command may indicate that the SPS transmission is performed on the next available subframe.
  • the eNB may send an SPS activation instruction multiple times to improve the reliability of the SPS activation instruction.
  • the UE may apply any one of the SPS activation instructions. Specifically, the UE may ignore or discard the same SPS activation command received later. Similarly, SPS release instructions can be similarly processed.
  • the SPS transmission may include uplink or downlink SPS new data transmission, uplink or downlink SPS retransmission data transmission, or SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction may include an uplink or downlink SPS activation command, an uplink or downlink SPS new command.
  • the second execution module 24 is configured to perform feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set determined by the determining module 21 are the same as the transmission direction of the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission.
  • the determining module 21 determines a fixed set of subframes in the TDD frame based on the parameter information that has been configured for it.
  • the parameter information may be configured for the UE by using a base station or a protocol.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, and a period of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change, and the sending One or more of the parameters such as the timing of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change command.
  • the parameter information configured for the UE is one or a combination of the parameter information of the uplink SPS and the parameter information of the downlink SPS.
  • the possible implementation of the determination module 21 to determine the set of fixed subframes in the TDD frame is the same as the four possible implementations provided by the embodiment shown in Figure 11 above.
  • the fixed downlink subframe set of the downlink feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission may be referenced by The fixed downlink subframe consists of the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the fixed uplink subframe set of the uplink feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission may be composed of the fixed uplink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the referenced TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration described in the foregoing embodiment, or may not be.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced herein may be at least one of a TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and a TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference may be used.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink of the downlink HARQ timing reference may be used. Proportional configuration.
  • the eNB may notify the UE of the above-mentioned TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission of the UE may be the TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration notified in the SIB1.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink proportion referenced by the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission is pre-configured or fixedly configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE.
  • the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission of the UE may be a pre-configured TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration such as 2, 5, and at this time, the TDD corresponding to the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission is up and down.
  • the line proportion configuration information may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE at this time.
  • the second execution module 24 performs feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission on the subframe in the fixed uplink subframe set, or performs feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission on the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the obtaining module 23 is further configured to acquire an SPS control instruction from a subframe in the fixed subframe set that is the same as the transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation command, and the SPS new transmission data block.
  • the SPS control instruction may instruct the UE to perform a combination of one or more of physical resources, modulation and coding modes, SPS transmission times, and the like used by the SPS transmission.
  • the subframe used to acquire the SPS control instruction is a downlink subframe in the fixed subframe set capable of scheduling SPS transmission.
  • the specific implementation process is the same as the related description of the obtaining module 23 in this embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first execution module 22 is configured to acquire a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission, and offset the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the period offset.
  • the uplink SPS may have a bias in the period of different TDD uplink-downlink configuration.
  • the offset of the uplink SPS period may be different under different TDD uplink-downlink ratio configurations. For details, see Table 2 above.
  • the SPS period offset of the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration can be known in conjunction with Table 2. Then, by using Equation 1 in the foregoing embodiment of the present application, it can be calculated that each uplink SPS transmission is activated. The specific moment of the secondary SPS transmission. For a detailed calculation, please refer to the illustration of the foregoing embodiment.
  • the first execution module 22 of the present embodiment is configured to obtain a second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and determine, by the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration and the uplink SPS transmission subframe, a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the downlink in the parameter information configured for the UE.
  • One of the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the HARQ timing reference, the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, and the uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the smallest number of uplink subframes in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be used.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be configured by using a broadcast message or an RRC message or other message.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be a pre-configured TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol. UE.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink configuration may be a TDD uplink-downlink configuration with a minimum number of uplink subframes in one LTE frame in the TDD uplink-downlink ratio set configured by the UE.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above.
  • the number of uplink subframes in one LTE radio frame is the smallest in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of TDD, and the ratio of the second reference uplink and downlink is set to 1.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be performed by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message. Configuration.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE at this time.
  • the obtaining the period offset of the uplink SPS transmission by the obtaining module 23 may also be specifically obtained by acquiring specific information of the offset, such as configuring which subframe or subframes by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message. Information on which offset or offsets to use. The UE performs a periodic offset based on this configuration information.
  • the specific information may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE at this time.
  • the first execution module 22 obtains the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and can refer to Table 2 to learn the SPS period offset of the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink ratio obtained by the first execution module 22 is configured as 1
  • the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission for the subframe 2 is 1 as shown in the above table 2.
  • the acquired second reference uplink and downlink proportion is configured as 3
  • the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission for subframe 4 is known as -2 from the above table 2.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink configuration may be the same as the first reference uplink-downlink configuration mentioned in the foregoing embodiment, or may be different.
  • the first execution module 22 can calculate the specific time of the uplink SPS transmission after the transmission period offset according to the offset and the above formula 1, and perform new data transmission at the specific time obtained by the calculation.
  • the uplink SPS period C is 10 ms
  • the uplink SPS transmission activation time Q is subframe 2
  • TDD uplink and downlink proportion is set to 1 sub-frame 2 offset V is 1 , then according to the above formula
  • the embodiment of the present application can determine the SPS period offset of an uplink subframe by using a fixed second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and offset the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the SPS period offset. Therefore, it is effective to avoid conflicts between SPS new data transmission and retransmission data in the same TTI.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a third embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • the user equipment 300 of this embodiment includes a processor 31, a memory 32, an input device 33, and an output.
  • Apparatus 34 and bus system 35 wherein:
  • the processor 31 controls the operation of the user equipment 300, which may also be referred to as a CPU (Central Processing Unit).
  • Processor 31 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • the processor 31 can also be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • Memory 32 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 31. A portion of memory 32 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM).
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • bus system 35 which may include, in addition to the data bus, a power bus, a control bus, a status signal bus, and the like. However, for clarity of description, various buses are labeled as bus system 35 in the figure.
  • Memory 32 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or subsets thereof, or their extended sets:
  • Operation instructions Includes various operation instructions for implementing various operations.
  • Operating System Includes a variety of system programs for implementing a variety of basic services and handling hardware-based tasks.
  • the processor 31 performs the following operations by calling an operation instruction stored in the memory 32 (the operation instruction can be stored in the operating system):
  • the processor 31 is configured to determine a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, in the fixed subframe set.
  • the SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the fixed subframe set is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink sub-frames when the uplink-downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • a subframe in a fixed downlink subframe set is a downlink subframe when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the processor 31 performs uplink SPS transmission on the fixed uplink subframe set or downlink SPS transmission on the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the processor 31 determines the fixed subframe set in the TDD frame by using the following four possible implementation scenarios:
  • the processor 31 is configured to obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and determines that the uplink and downlink attributes remain unchanged in at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations. Subframes to form a fixed set of subframes.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set may include two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations. For example, it can be the scale configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1, or ⁇ 1 , 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ and so on.
  • the processor 31 determines, according to the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the acquired TDD frame, which subframes the fixed subframe set specifically includes in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) radio frame. For example, if the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame configured for the UE is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above, the UE may determine the subframe ⁇ 0, 1, 5 in one LTE radio frame.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set may further include an uplink and downlink proportion configuration that is not in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in the foregoing Table 1, and is not limited in the present invention.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol.
  • the eNB may not need to notify the UE of the uplink and downlink ratio of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message. Configure the collection.
  • Solution 2 The processor 31 acquires an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and determines that the uplink and downlink attributes remain unchanged in at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations. To form a fixed set of subframes.
  • the processor 31 does not need to determine the fixed subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set, and directly adopts the subframe in the specified fixed subframe set for SPS transmission.
  • the fixed subframe set specified herein may be a fixed subframe set or a subset of fixed subframe sets obtained by the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the set of fixed subframes may be a fixed downlink subframe set obtained by the configured TDD uplink-downlink proportion configuration set or one or more subsets of the fixed downlink subframe set, and the uplink SPS is similar.
  • the UE may obtain the indication information through a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message.
  • the processor 31 obtains at least one first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and forms a fixed uplink subframe set by the uplink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and the downlink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration
  • the special subframe forms a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the fixed subframe set is at least one of a fixed uplink subframe set and a fixed downlink subframe set, where the subframes in the fixed uplink subframe set are uplink subframes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the subframes in the fixed downlink subframe set are all downlink subframes when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the processor 31 obtains at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, and the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be one or more.
  • the first reference uplink ratio configuration of the uplink SPS reference is different from the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink SPS reference.
  • the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS are configured with different first reference uplink-downlink ratios, for the uplink SPS, the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink SPS reference forms a fixed uplink subframe set, and for the downlink SPS, the downlink SPS The downlink subframes in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the SPS reference form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the fixed uplink subframe set is formed by the uplink subframe in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and is configured by the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the downlink subframe and the special subframe form the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration used to form the fixed downlink subframe set is
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration is a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration in the SIB1.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may include at least one of a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the uplink and downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the downlink HARQ. Timing reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the processor 31 obtains at least one first reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, if for the uplink SPS, the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the downlink HARQ timing forms a fixed uplink subframe set, if for the downlink SPS, The downlink subframe and the special subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration referenced by the optional UE uplink SPS transmission may be a pre-configured uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, possibly The eNB is not required to notify the UE.
  • the processor 31 acquires an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame, where the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations
  • the uplink-downlink ratio configuration in which the number of uplink and downlink attributes is the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission is selected, and the fixed subframe set is formed by the subframes in the selected uplink-downlink ratio configuration that are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the processor 31 may obtain an uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message, and the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set includes two or more uplink and downlink proportion configurations.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set may be the scale configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1, or ⁇ 1 , 2, 3 ⁇ , or ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ and so on. That is, it may be a combination of any two or more of the uplink and downlink proportion configurations of Table 1 above, or may also include an uplink and downlink proportion configuration that is not in the above Table 1.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration set of the TDD frame may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol. In this case, the eNB may not need to notify the UE of the uplink and downlink proportion of the TDD frame by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message or other message. Configure the collection.
  • the processor 31 may select the uplink and downlink attributes and the SPS transmission transmission from the obtained at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations according to the indication information of the uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the least number of subframes with the same uplink and downlink attributes as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission.
  • the uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the smallest number of subframes in the same direction determines that the subframes with the same transmission direction in the SPS transmission form a fixed subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the smallest number of downlink subframes is selected from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and the downlink subframes obtained in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the uplink and downlink proportions with the least number of uplink subframes are selected from the at least two uplink and downlink proportion configurations, and the uplink subframes obtained by the uplink and downlink ratio configuration form a fixed uplink subframe set.
  • the memory 32 further stores a fixed set of subframes in the TDD frame determined by the processor 31.
  • the processor 31 is further configured to: obtain an SPS control instruction from a subframe in the fixed subframe set that is the same as a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, A combination of one or more of the SPS retransmission data block instructions and the SPS release instructions.
  • the SPS control instruction may instruct the UE to perform a combination of one or more of physical resources, modulation and coding modes, SPS transmission times, and the like used by the SPS transmission.
  • the processor 31 acquires an SPS control instruction from a downlink subframe in which a SPS transmission can be scheduled in a fixed subframe set. Specifically, the acquiring an SPS control command from a subframe in a fixed subframe set that is the same as a transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, that the UE receives the SPS on the subframe C-RNTI masked PDCCH control instruction.
  • the SPS control instruction is used to indicate that the SPS is activated
  • the SPS control instruction is the SPS activation command.
  • the processor 31 acquires an SPS activation command from the same subframe in which the SPS activation command is transmitted in the same direction to activate the subframe for the SPS transmission.
  • the SPS activation commands of the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS can only be obtained from the downlink subframe.
  • the SPS activation instruction for each subframe can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe in which the subframe can be scheduled.
  • the downlink scheduling command transmission and the downlink data transmission are in the same subframe, that is, the downlink SPS activation command may activate the downlink SPS transmission in the subframe in which the SPS activation command is transmitted, and the subsequent SPS transmission may occur periodically.
  • the SPS activation command can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe in which the corresponding uplink subframe can be scheduled.
  • the uplink scheduling command transmits K subframes before the uplink data transmission, where the K value is different according to different TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations. For example, K can be 4, 6, etc.
  • the processor 31 only listens for the SPS activation instruction at the time when the SPS activation instruction can transmit, or the UE does not listen to the SPS activation instruction at other times, or the UE ignores the SPS after listening to the SPS activation instruction at other times. Activate the command.
  • the SPS activation instruction for the activated subframe, if the SPS activation command is received again, the SPS activation instruction can also be regarded as an SPS modification instruction.
  • the resources allocated by the SPS activation instruction can be released by receiving the SPS scheduling instruction for scheduling of subsequent data, thereby avoiding waste of resources.
  • the SPS scheduling instruction acquired by the obtaining module 23 is used to indicate the SPS release, it may be referred to as an SPS release instruction.
  • the SPS release command may be transmitted on a downlink subframe capable of scheduling a corresponding subframe.
  • the SPS release command can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe that can schedule the corresponding uplink subframe.
  • the SPS release command of the uplink subframe 2 with the uplink and downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ uplink SPS if K is 6, then the SPS release command of subframe 2 can only be transmitted on the downlink subframe 6 of the previous frame.
  • the SPS release command for the downlink subframe 1 with the uplink-downlink ratio of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ is transmitted on the downlink subframe 1, and the SPS release command of the downlink subframe 5 is transmitted on the downlink subframe 5. So on and so forth.
  • the SPS release command may also be transmitted at an SPS transmission time that can be scheduled for actual use.
  • the above downlink proportion configuration set is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ as an example, and it is assumed that In the first method, the fixed subframe set is determined. If the parameter information of the downlink SPS is configured, and the SPS period is 20 ms (the length of the subframe is lms), it is assumed that the time when the SPS transmission is activated is 0, and the UE performs the downlink SPS transmission. For 0, 20, 40...., the SPS release command can be transmitted at 20, 40, etc., which can schedule the actual use of the SPS transmission.
  • the SPS activation command may be not limited to the fixed downlink subframe, but may be in any downlink subframe, including fixed.
  • the subframe and the flexible subframe are transmitted, so the SPS activation command may indicate that the SPS transmission is performed on the next available subframe.
  • the eNB may send an SPS activation instruction multiple times to improve the reliability of the SPS activation instruction.
  • the UE may apply any one of the SPS activation instructions. Specifically, the UE may ignore or discard the same SPS activation command received later. Similarly, SPS release instructions can be similarly processed.
  • the SPS transmission may include uplink or downlink SPS new data transmission, uplink or downlink SPS retransmission data transmission, or SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction may include an uplink or downlink SPS activation command, an uplink or downlink SPS new command.
  • the processor 31 is further configured to perform feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission on a subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are the same as the transmission direction of the feedback transmission corresponding to the SPS transmission.
  • the processor 31 performs the feedback transmission corresponding to the downlink SPS transmission on the subframe in the fixed uplink subframe set, or performs the feedback transmission corresponding to the uplink SPS transmission on the subframe in the fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the processor 31 is further configured to acquire an SPS control instruction from a subframe in the fixed subframe set that is the same as the transmission direction of the SPS control instruction, where the SPS control instruction includes an SPS activation instruction, an SPS new transmission data block instruction, and an SPS retransmission data block.
  • the SPS control instruction may instruct the UE to perform a combination of one or more of physical resources, modulation and coding modes, SPS transmission times, and the like used for SPS transmission. Used to get SPS
  • the subframe of the control instruction is a downlink subframe in the fixed subframe set capable of scheduling SPS transmission.
  • the UE receives the PDCCH control instruction that is masked by the SPS C-RNTI in the subframe.
  • the specific implementation process is the same as the above-mentioned acquisition of the SPS control instruction in this embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the processor 31 may further obtain a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission, and offset the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the period offset.
  • the processor 31 obtains a second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration, and determines a period offset of the uplink SPS transmission by the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration and the subframe of the uplink SPS transmission.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be the downlink in the parameter information configured for the UE.
  • One of the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the HARQ timing reference, the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference, and the uplink-downlink ratio configuration with the smallest number of uplink subframes in the first reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be used.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be configured by using a broadcast message or an RRC message or other message.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be a pre-configured TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol. UE.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink configuration may be a TDD uplink-downlink configuration with a minimum number of uplink subframes in one LTE frame in the TDD uplink-downlink ratio set configured by the UE.
  • the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set is the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ in Table 1 above.
  • the number of uplink subframes in one LTE radio frame is the smallest in the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of TDD, and the ratio of the second reference uplink and downlink is set to 1.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be configured by a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink proportion configuration may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE.
  • the period offset of the uplink SPS transmission obtained by the processor 31 may also be obtained by acquiring specific information of the offset, for example, which subframe or subframes are configured by using a broadcast message or a dedicated RRC message. Information on which offset or offsets to use.
  • the UE performs a periodic offset according to this configuration information.
  • the specific information may be fixedly configured or pre-configured in the protocol, and the eNB may not be required to notify the UE at this time.
  • the processor 31 obtains the second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and can refer to Table 2 to learn the SPS period offset of the uplink subframe in the uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the second reference uplink and downlink ratio obtained by the processor 31 is configured to be 1, and the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission for the subframe 2 is 1 as shown in the above table 2.
  • the acquired second reference uplink-downlink ratio is configured to be 3, and the periodic offset of the uplink SPS transmission for subframe 4 is known as -2 from the above Table 2.
  • the second reference uplink-downlink configuration may be the same as the first reference uplink-downlink configuration mentioned in the foregoing embodiment, or may be different.
  • the processor 31 can calculate the specific time of the uplink SPS transmission after the transmission period offset, and perform new data transmission at the specific time obtained by the calculation.
  • the uplink SPS period C is 10 ms
  • the uplink SPS transmission activation time Q is subframe 3
  • the default starts from the 0th radio frame, that is, S is
  • TDD uplink and downlink proportion is set to 1 sub-frame 3 offset V is -1, then according to the above formula
  • the fixed second reference uplink-downlink ratio configuration can determine the SPS period offset of an uplink subframe, and offset the transmission period of the uplink SPS transmission according to the SPS period offset. Therefore, it is effective to avoid conflicts between SPS new data transmission and retransmission data in the same ⁇ .
  • each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor 31 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or carried out.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 32, and the processor 31 reads the information in the memory 32 and combines the hardware to perform the steps of the above method.
  • the user equipment provided by the embodiment of the present application determines a fixed subframe set, where the fixed The uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink-downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes, and the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are performed on the same subframe as the SPS transmission. SPS transmission. In this way, the normal execution of the SPS during the dynamic uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD can be implemented, the SPS performance is prompted, and the complexity of the UE performing the SPS is reduced.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present application.
  • the base station 400 of this embodiment includes a configuration module 41 and a notification module 42, wherein:
  • the configuration module 41 is configured to configure, for the UE, parameter information that can determine a fixed subframe set, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically.
  • the parameter information configured by the configuration module 41 for the UE includes the indication information, and further includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference, a period of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change, and a TDD uplink and downlink transmission. Proportional configuration changes one or more of the parameters such as the moment of the command.
  • the indication information is used to indicate, in what manner, the UE determines a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame.
  • the present embodiment provides the following information about the indication information that the base station notifies the UE:
  • the indication information notified by the base station to the UE is that the set of fixed subframes is determined by using the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the UE obtains a fixed uplink subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD, and the uplink and downlink proportions of the TDD frame are dynamically changed when the uplink and downlink proportions of the TDD frame are dynamically changed. Forming a fixed downlink subframe set for the subframe of the downlink subframe.
  • the indication information that the base station notifies the UE is a fixed subframe set directly designated by the configured indication information.
  • the base station determines one or more subsets of the fixed subframe set or the fixed subframe set according to the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE.
  • the subframes in the fixed subframe set are directly specified by the indication information. For example, if the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , the subframe ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ is a downlink subframe or a special subframe in an LTE radio frame, that is, a fixed downlink sub-frame.
  • the frame subset, ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ is an uplink subframe, that is, a fixed uplink subframe subset.
  • the base station may directly specify, by using the indication information, that the fixed subframe set may be a set of one or more subframes in ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ or ⁇ 1 , 5, 6 ⁇ , etc.
  • the uplink SPS configuration parameter is configured for the UE, the base station
  • the indication information may directly specify that the fixed subframe set may be a set of one or more subframes of ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ , such as ⁇ 2, 3 ⁇ or ⁇ 7, 8 ⁇ .
  • the base station notifies the UE that the indication information is the reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration to determine the fixed subframe set.
  • the base station notifies the UE to indicate the information, and also configures at least one reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration for the UE.
  • the UE determines the fixed subframe set by using the referenced TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS can be configured with different reference TDD uplink and downlink proportions, or the same reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the uplink SPS may form a fixed uplink subframe set by using the uplink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and the downlink SPS may form a fixed downlink subframe set by using the downlink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration may include at least one of a downlink-proportional configuration of a downlink HARQ timing reference and an uplink-downlink ratio configuration of an uplink HARQ timing reference.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference is used.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the uplink HARQ timing reference is used.
  • the base station informs the UE to determine the fixed subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in which the uplink and downlink attributes of the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set have the same number of subframes as the SPS transmission.
  • the base station may configure a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set for the UE, so that the UE finds the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the same subframe with the same uplink and downlink attributes and the same SPS transmission direction according to the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the notification module 42 notifies the UE of the parameter information configured for the UE, and the notification module 42 may notify the UE by using a system broadcast message, or may notify the UE by using a dedicated RRC message, such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message, or a combination of the two. That is, a part of the parameter information is notified to the UE through the system broadcast message, and another part of the parameter information is notified to the UE through a dedicated RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message.
  • the UE may send an RRC Complete message to the base station.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a second implementation manner of a base station provided by the present application.
  • the base station 500 of this embodiment includes a processor 51, a memory 52, an input device 53, an output device 54, and a bus system 55, where:
  • the processor 51 controls the operation of the base station 500, which may also be referred to as a CPU (Central). Processing Unit, central processing unit).
  • Processor 51 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • the processor 51 can also be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • Memory 52 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 51. A portion of memory 52 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM).
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • bus system 55 which may include, in addition to the data bus, a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • bus system 55 may include, in addition to the data bus, a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • various buses are labeled as bus system 55 in the figure.
  • Memory 52 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or subsets thereof, or their extended sets:
  • Operation instructions Includes various operation instructions for implementing various operations.
  • Operating System Includes a variety of system programs for implementing a variety of basic services and handling hardware-based tasks.
  • the processor 51 performs the following operations by calling an operation instruction stored in the memory 52 (the operation instruction can be stored in the operating system):
  • the processor 51 configures the parameter information of the fixed subframe set for the UE and notifies the parameter information to the UE, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes. change.
  • the parameter information configured by the processor 51 for the UE includes the indication information, and further includes at least a set of possible TDD uplink and downlink proportion configurations, a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the downlink HARQ timing reference, a period of the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration change, and a TDD uplink and downlink transmission. Proportional configuration changes one or more of the parameters such as the moment of the command.
  • the indication information is used to indicate, in what manner, the UE determines a fixed subframe set in the TDD frame.
  • the present embodiment provides the following information about the indication information that the base station notifies the UE:
  • the indication information that the base station notifies the UE is to determine the fixed subframe set by using the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the UE obtains a set of fixed uplink subframes by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD, and the uplink and downlink proportions of the TDD frame are dynamically changed.
  • the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically, the subframes of the downlink subframe form a fixed downlink subframe set.
  • the indication information notified by the base station to the UE is a fixed subframe set directly designated by the configured indication information.
  • the base station determines one or more subsets of the fixed subframe set or the fixed subframe set according to the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set configured for the UE.
  • the subframes in the fixed subframe set are specified directly by the indication information.
  • the base station notifies the UE that the indication information is the reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration to determine the fixed subframe set.
  • the base station notifies the UE to indicate the information, and also configures at least one reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration for the UE.
  • the UE determines the fixed subframe set by using the referenced TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the uplink SPS and the downlink SPS can be configured with different reference TDD uplink and downlink proportions, or the same reference TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration.
  • the uplink SPS may form a fixed uplink subframe set by using the uplink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration, and the downlink SPS may form a fixed downlink subframe set by using the downlink subframe in the reference TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration.
  • the base station informs the UE to determine the fixed subframe set by using the uplink and downlink proportion configuration in which the uplink and downlink attributes of the configured TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set have the same number of subframes as the SPS transmission.
  • the base station may configure a TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set for the UE, so that the UE finds the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration with the same subframe with the same uplink and downlink attributes and the same SPS transmission direction according to the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration set.
  • the processor 51 may notify the UE through a system broadcast message, or may notify the UE through a dedicated RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message, or a combination of the two. That is, a part of the parameter information is notified to the UE through the system broadcast message, and another part of the parameter information is notified to the UE through a dedicated RRC message such as an RRC reconfiguration message or other message.
  • the UE may send an RRC Complete message to the base station.
  • each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 51 or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or executed.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • Software modules can be located in random access memory, flash memory, Read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc., are well-known storage media in the field.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 52, and the processor 51 reads the information in the memory 52 and performs the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • the user equipment 600 of the present embodiment includes a judging module 61 and a transmission control module 62, where: the judging module 61 is configured to be used in the upper and lower sides of the TDD frame.
  • the line proportion configuration changes dynamically, it is determined whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes in which the SPS transmission is performed have changed;
  • the determining module 61 determines whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes in which the SPS transmission is performed also changes. For example, the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of TDD dynamically changes between ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ . When changing from 0 to 1, sub-frames ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ are all downlink subframes, and subframes ⁇ 2, 3 , 7, 8 ⁇ are all uplink subframes, and the uplink subframe when the TDD uplink-downlink ratio is configured to 0 becomes the downlink subframe when the uplink-downlink ratio is set to 1, and the subframe 9 is determined by the TDD uplink-downlink ratio.
  • the uplink subframe when the configuration is 0 becomes the downlink subframe when the uplink-downlink ratio is set to 1. Therefore, when the ratio of uplink and downlink from TDD changes from 0 to 1, the uplink and downlink attributes of subframes ⁇ 0, 1 , 5, 6 ⁇ and subframes ⁇ 2, 3, 7, 8 ⁇ do not change, subframe ⁇ 4, The upper and lower attributes of 9 ⁇ have changed. The judgment result is output to the transmission control module 42.
  • the transmission control module 62 ignores the SPS transmission when the determination module 61 determines that the uplink and downlink attributes have changed.
  • the transmission control module 61 ignores the SPS transmission on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes change when the judgment module 61 determines that the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframe in which the SPS transmission is performed changes.
  • the determining module 61 of the user equipment in this embodiment may further be used to determine whether the ignored SPS transmission is an SPS new data transmission.
  • the judgment result is output to the transmission control module 62.
  • the transmission control module 62 is further configured to re-execute the ignored SPS new data transmission in response to the subsequent scheduling instruction when the determining module 61 determines that the SPS transmission is a SPS new data transmission.
  • the transmission control module 62 of the user equipment in this embodiment may be further configured to delay the SPS transmission to the Wth SPS available subframe after the SPS available subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes are changed, or The SPS transmits the Mth available SPS available before the SPS available subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes change, where W and M are natural numbers, respectively.
  • the transmission direction of the subframe 4 is changed when the ratio is changed to 1.
  • Subframe 3 (M l).
  • the downlink is similar and will not be described again.
  • the user equipment of the present embodiment dynamically changes the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the TDD frame, it is determined whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes of the SPS transmission are changed, and the uplink and downlink attributes are ignored when the uplink and downlink attributes change. SPS transmission on changed subframes. In this way, a method for processing SPS data transmission when the uplink and downlink attributes of some available subframes for performing SPS transmission also change due to changes in the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration is provided.
  • the user equipment provided by the embodiment may further process the ignored SPS transmission, that is, when the ignored SPS transmission is the SPS new data transmission, further retransmit the ignored SPS transmission in response to the subsequent scheduling instruction, thereby It is possible to ensure that data in the new SPS data transmission is ignored.
  • the user equipment provided by this embodiment may also perform transmission by delaying the ignored SPS transmission to a later available subframe or advancing to a previous available subframe. In this way, data loss due to changes in the uplink and downlink attributes of the subframe can be effectively avoided, and SPS transmission performance and reliability are improved.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a fifth embodiment of a user equipment according to the present application.
  • the user equipment 700 includes a processor 71, a memory 72, an input device 73, an output device 74, and a bus system 75, where:
  • the processor 71 controls the operation of the user equipment 700, which may also be referred to as a CPU (Central Processing Unit).
  • Processor 71 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • the processor 71 can also be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic. Devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • Memory 72 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 71. A portion of memory 72 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM).
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • bus system 75 which may include, in addition to the data bus, a power bus, a control bus, a status signal bus, and the like. However, for clarity of description, various buses are labeled as bus system 75 in the figure.
  • Memory 72 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or subsets thereof, or their extended sets:
  • Operation instructions Includes various operation instructions for implementing various operations.
  • Operating System Includes a variety of system programs for implementing a variety of basic services and handling hardware-based tasks.
  • the processor 71 performs the following operations by calling an operation instruction stored in the memory 72 (which can be stored in the operating system):
  • the processor 71 is configured to determine whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes of the SPS transmission change when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame changes dynamically, and ignore the SPS transmission when the uplink and downlink attributes change.
  • the processor 71 determines whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes in which the SPS transmission is performed also changes. For example, the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of TDD dynamically changes between ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ . When changing from 0 to 1, subframes ⁇ 0, 1, 5, 6 ⁇ are all downlink subframes, subframes ⁇ 2, 3 , 7, 8 ⁇ are all uplink subframes, and the uplink subframes when the subframe 4 is configured with the TDD uplink-downlink ratio being 0 is changed into the downlink subframe, and the subframe 9 is changed by the uplink subframe when the TDD uplink-downlink ratio configuration is 0.
  • the processor 71 determines that the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframe in which the SPS transmission is performed changes, the SPS transmission on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes change is ignored.
  • the processor 71 of the embodiment may further determine whether the ignored SPS transmission is a SPS new data transmission, and the ignored SPS transmission is a SPS new data transmission. At the time of the input, the ignored SPS new data transmission is re-executed in response to subsequent scheduling instructions.
  • the processor 71 of the embodiment may be further configured to delay the SPS transmission to the Wth SPS available subframe after the SPS available subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes are changed, or advance the SPS transmission to the upper end.
  • the transmission direction of the subframe 4 is changed when the ratio is changed to 1.
  • Subframe 3 (M l).
  • the downlink is similar and will not be described again.
  • the method disclosed in the above embodiments of the present application may be applied to the processor 71 or implemented by the processor 71.
  • each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor 71 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or carried out.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 72, and the processor 71 reads the information in the memory 72 and combines the hardware to perform the steps of the above method.
  • the user equipment of the present embodiment dynamically changes the uplink-downlink ratio configuration of the TDD frame, it is determined whether the uplink and downlink attributes of the SPS available subframes of the SPS transmission are changed, and the uplink and downlink attributes are ignored when the uplink and downlink attributes change. SPS transmission on changed subframes. In this way, a method for processing SPS data transmission when the uplink and downlink attributes of some available subframes for performing SPS transmission also change due to changes in the TDD uplink and downlink proportion configuration is provided.
  • the user equipment provided by this embodiment may further implement the ignored SPS transmission.
  • the processing is performed, that is, when the ignored SPS transmission is the SPS new data transmission, the ignored SPS transmission is further retransmitted in response to the subsequent scheduling instruction, thereby ensuring data loss in the neglected SPS new data transmission.
  • the user equipment provided by this embodiment may also perform transmission by delaying the ignored SPS transmission to a later available subframe or advancing to a previous available subframe. In this way, data loss due to changes in the uplink and downlink attributes of the subframe can be effectively avoided, and SPS transmission performance and reliability are improved.
  • the semi-persistent scheduling method and the user equipment provided by the foregoing embodiments are determined by determining a fixed subframe set, where the uplink and downlink attributes of each subframe in the fixed subframe set remain unchanged when the uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD frame dynamically changes.
  • the SPS transmission is performed on the subframe in which the uplink and downlink attributes in the fixed subframe set are the same as the transmission direction of the SPS transmission. In this way, the normal execution of the SPS in the dynamic uplink and downlink proportion configuration of the TDD can be implemented, the SPS performance is prompted, and the complexity of the UE performing the SPS is reduced.
  • the disclosed systems, apparatus, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device implementations described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be used. Combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, i.e., may be located in one place, or may be distributed over multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the present embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application may be embodied in the form of a software product in the form of a software product or all or part of the technical solution, which is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions. All or part of the steps of the method of the various embodiments of the present application are performed by a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Time-Division Multiplex Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本发明属于通信技术领域,提供一种半静态调度方法及用户设备。其中,半静态调度方法包括:确定TDD帧中的固定子帧集合,其中固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变;在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行SPS传输。通过这样的方式,能够在为UE动态配置TDD上下行比例的情况下,使SPS不受灵活子帧的影响而正常传输。

Description

一种半静态调度方法及用户设备 技术领域
本发明涉及通信技术领域, 特别涉及一种半静态调度方法及用户设备。 背景技术
在 LTE 系统中, 支持两种帧结构-频分双工 (FDD)和时分双工 (TDD)。 在 TDD帧结构中, 如图 1所示, 10ms的无线帧分为两个长度为 5ms的半 帧, 每个半帧由 5个长为 lms的子帧组成, 其中包括 4个普通子帧和 1个 特殊子帧, 普通子帧由两个 0.5ms组成, 而特殊子帧由 3个特殊时隙 (上行 导频时隙 UpPTS、 保护间隔 GP和下行导频时隙 DwPTS, 其中 DwPTS用 于下行信号的发送, UpPTS用于上行信号发送, GP是 TDD上下行转换的 保护间隔)组成。
SPS(Semi-Persistent Scheduling)是一种半静态调度机制, 主要方法是通 过无线资源控制 (RRC, Radio Resource Control ) 消息为 UE配置一套 SPS 相关的参数, 以上行 SPS为例, 配置的参数可以包括 SPS的周期, 隐式释 放上行 SPS的条件等; 以下行 SPS为例, 配置参数可以包括 SPS的周期, 下行 SPS传输对应的上行反馈资源, 为 SPS预留的 HARQ进程数等参数。 然后通过 SPS激活命令激活 SPS传输资源, UE根据该 SPS激活命令周期 性的使用 SPS传输资源进行 SPS传输。
为了更好的适应不同业务的变化, 为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置 可能会动态改变。 TDD上下行比例配置动态改变的结果, 其中有些子帧的 方向不会发生变化(比如固定上行子帧或固定下行子帧), 但有些子帧方向 可能会发生变化(如灵活子帧)。 由于灵活子帧的存在, 在 TDD上下行比 例配置改变时, 可能会有本来用于上行 SPS的子帧变成下行, 或本来用于 下行 SPS的子帧变成上行, 此时 SPS传输会受到影响。 现有技术没有解决 对于 TDD系统中某些子帧可用于灵活子帧时,实现和运行 SPS机制的方法。 发明内容
本申请主要解决的技术问题是如何在为 UE动态配置 TDD上下行比例 的情况下, 避免灵活子帧的存在影响 SPS的正常传输。 有鉴于此, 本申请提出一种半静态调度方法, 能够在为 UE动态配置 TDD上下行比例的情况下, 使 SPS不受灵活子帧的影响而正常传输。
第一方面, 本申请提供一种半静态调度方法, 包括: 确定 TDD帧中的 固定子帧集合, 其中所述固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变; 在所述固定子帧集合 中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中:所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括: 获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其 中所述上下行比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置; 确定所述上下 行属性在所述至少两个上下行比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成所述固 定子帧集合。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式中:所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括: 获取指示信息, 其中所述指示信息直接 指定所述固定子帧集合中的所述子帧。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中:所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括: 获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置; 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子帧集 合。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一至第三种任一可能的实现方式, 在第 一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中: 所述固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集 合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种, 其中所述固定上行子帧集合中的子 帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为上行子帧, 所述固 定下行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时 均为下行子帧; 所述在所述固定子帧集合上进行 SPS传输的步骤进一步包 括: 在所述固定上行子帧集合上进行上行 SPS传输, 或者在所述固定下行 子帧集合上进行下行 SPS传输。
结合第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第五种可能的 实现方式中: 所述由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形 成所述固定子帧集合的步骤进一步包括: 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置 中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配 置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
结合第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第六种可能的 实现方式中: 形成所述固定上行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比 例配置不同于形成所述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比 例配置。
结合第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式或第六种可能的实现方式, 在 第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中: 所述形成所述固定下行子帧集合所 使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置为第一系统信息块指示的比例配置。
结合第一方面的第五种至第七种任一可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的 第八种可能的实现方式中: 所述第一参考上下行比例配置包括下行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中 的至少一种, 其中由所述下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的上行 子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比 例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式中:所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括: 获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其 中所述上下行比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置; 从所述至少两 个上下行比例配置中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数 最少的上下行比例配置, 并由选择的所述上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的 传输方向相同的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合。
结合第一方面的第四种至第九种任一可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的 第十种可能的实现方式中: 通过系统广播消息、 专用 RRC消息中的至少一 种获取所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种至第十种任一可能的实现方式, 在 第一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中: 所述半静态调度方法进一步包括: 在所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈传输的传 输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种至第十一种任一可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中: 所述半静态调度方法进一步包 括: 从所述固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中所述 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数 据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。
结合第一方面的第十二种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第十三种可 能的实现方式中: 用于获取所述 SPS控制指令的所述子帧为所述固定子帧 集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种至第十三种任一可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中: 所述在所述固定子帧集合中的 子帧执行 SPS传输的步骤包括: 获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量; 根据所 述周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
结合第一方面的第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第十五种可 能的实现方式中: 所述获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量的步骤具体包括: 获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第二参考上下行比例配置和所述 上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量。
结合第一方面的第十五种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第十六种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置为所述下行 HARQ定时参 考的上下行比例配置、 所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述 第一参考上下行比例配置中上行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一种。
结合第一方面的第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第十七种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置为 UE获取的 TDD上下行 比例配置集合中上行子帧最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。
结合第一方面的第十五种至第十七种任一可能的实现方式, 在第一方 面的第十八种可能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置在协议中 固定配置或预配置。
第二方面, 提供一种半静态调度方法, 所述半静态调度方法包括: 在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时,判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用 子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化; 若所述上下行属性发生变化, 则忽略所 述 SPS传输。
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中: 所述半静态 调度方法进一步包括: 判断所述 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输; 若所述 SPS传输为 SPS新数据传输, 则响应后续的调度指令重新执行忽略的所述 SPS新数据传输。
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式中: 所述半静态 调度方法进一步包括: 将所述 SPS传输延迟至所述上下行属性发生变化的 所述 SPS可用子帧后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧, 或者将所述 SPS传输提 前至所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用 子帧, 其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
第三方面, 提供一种用户设备, 所述用户设备包括确定模块和第一执 行模块, 其中: 所述确定模块用于确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中所 述固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配 置发生动态变化时保持不变; 所述第一执行模块用于在所述确定模块确定 的所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子 帧上执行 SPS传输。
结合第三方面, 在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中: 所述确定模 块用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合 包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 确定所述上下行属性在所述至少两个上下 行比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成所述固定子帧集合。
结合第三方面, 在第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式中: 所述确定模 块用于获取指示信息, 其中所述指示信息直接指定所述固定子帧集合中的 所述子帧。
结合第三方面, 在第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式中: 所述确定模 块用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第一参考上下行比例 配置中的特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种至第三种任一可能的实现方式, 在 第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中: 所述固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧 集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种, 其中所述固定上行子帧集合中的 子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为上行子帧, 所述 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化 时均为下行子帧; 所述第一执行模块用于在所述固定上行子帧集合上进行 上行 SPS传输, 或者在所述固定下行子帧集合上进行下行 SPS传输。
结合第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第五种可能的 实现方式中: 所述确定模块用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由 所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下 行子帧集合。
结合第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第六种可能的 实现方式中: 形成所述固定上行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比 例配置不同于形成所述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比 例配置。
结合第三方面的第五种或第六种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第七 种可能的实现方式中: 所述形成所述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一 参考上下行比例配置为第一系统信息块指示的比例配置。
结合第三方面第五种至第七种任一可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第 八种可能的实现方式中: 所述第一参考上下行比例配置包括下行 HARQ定 时参考的上下行比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置, 其 中所述确定模块用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述下行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集 合, 由所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子 帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
结合第三方面, 在第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式中: 所述确定模 块用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合 包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 从所述至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上 下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 并 由选择的所述上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成所 述固定子帧集合。
结合第三方面的第四种至第九种任一可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的 第十种可能的实现方式中:所述确定模块用于通过系统广播消息、专用 RRC 消息中的至少一种获取所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种至第十种任一可能的实现方式, 在 第三方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中: 所述用户设备进一步包括第二执 行模块, 其中, 所述第二执行模块用于在确定模块确定的所述固定子帧集 合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈传输的传输方向相同的子帧 上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种至第十一种任一可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中: 所述用户设备进一步包括获取 模块, 所述获取模块用于从确定模块确定的所述固定子帧集合中与 SPS控 制指令的传输方向的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中所述传输控制指令包 括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS 释 放指令中的一个或多个的组合。
结合第三方面的第十二种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第十三种可 能的实现方式中: 用于获取所述 SPS控制指令的所述子帧为所述固定子帧 集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种至第十三种任一可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中: 所述第一执行模块用于获取上 行 SPS传输的周期偏移量, 根据所述周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周 期进行偏移。
结合第三方面的第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第十五种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第一执行模块用于获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第二参考上下行比例配置和所述上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS 传输的周期偏移量。
结合第三方面的第十五种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第十六种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置为所述下行 HARQ定时参 考的上下行比例配置、 所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述 第一参考上下行比例配置中上行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一种。
结合第三方面的第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第十七种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置为 UE获取的 TDD上下行 比例配置集合中上行子帧最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。
结合第三方面的第十五种至第十七种任一可能的实现方式, 在第三方 面的第十八种可能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置在协议中 固定配置或预配置。
第四方面, 提供一种用户设备, 所述用户设备包括判断模块和传输控 制模块, 其中: 所述判断模块用于在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变 化时, 判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化; 所 述传输控制模块在所述判断模块判断到所述上下行属性发生变化时, 忽略 所述 SPS传输。
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中: 所述判断模 块进一步用于判断所述 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输; 所述传输控制模 块进一步用于在所述判断模块判断到所述 SPS传输是 SPS新数据传输时, 响应后续的调度指令重新执行忽略的所述 SPS新数据传输。
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式中: 所述传输控 制模块进一步用于将所述 SPS传输延迟至所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将所述 SPS传输提前至至 所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧, 其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
第五方面, 提供一种用户设备, 所述用户设备包括存储器和处理器, 所述处理器与所述存储器电连接, 其中: 所述处理器用于确定 TDD帧中的 固定子帧集合, 其中所述固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变, 在所述固定子帧集合 中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输; 结合第五方面, 在第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器 用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包 括至少两个上下行比例配置, 确定所述上下行属性在所述至少两个上下行 比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成所述固定子帧集合。
结合第五方面, 在第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器 用于获取指示信息, 其中所述指示信息直接指定所述固定子帧集合中的所 述子帧。
结合第五方面, 在第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器 用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配 置中的特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种至第三种任一可能的实现方式, 在 第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式中: 所述固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧 集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种, 其中所述固定上行子帧集合中的 子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为上行子帧组成, 所述固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态 变化时均为下行子帧; 所述处理器进一步用于在所述固定上行子帧集合上 进行上行 SPS传输, 或者在所述固定下行子帧集合上进行下行 SPS传输。
结合第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第五种可能的 实现方式中: 所述处理器用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所 述第一参考上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由 所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行 子帧集合。
结合第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第六种可能的 实现方式中: 形成所述固定上行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比 例配置不同于形成所述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比 例配置。
结合第五方面的第五种或第六种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第七 种可能的实现方式中: 所述形成所述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一 参考上下行比例配置为第一系统信息块指示的比例配置。
结合第五方面第五种至第七种任一可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第 八种可能的实现方式中: 所述第一参考上下行比例配置包括下行 HARQ定 时参考的上下行比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置, 所 述处理器用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述下行 HARQ定 时参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所 述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所 述固定下行子帧集合。
结合第五方面, 在第五方面的第九种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器 用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包 括至少两个上下行比例配置, 从所述至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上下 行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 并由 选择的所述上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成所述 固定子帧集合。
结合第五方面的第四种至第九种任一可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的 第十种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器通过系统广播消息、 专用 RRC消息 中的至少一种获取所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种至第十种任一可能的实现方式, 在 第五方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器进一步用于在所述固 定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈传输的传输方向相 同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种至第十一种任一可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器进一步用于从所述 固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指 令, 其中所述 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。
结合第五方面的第十二种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第十三种可 能的实现方式中: 用于获取所述 SPS控制指令的所述子帧为所述固定子帧 集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种至第十三种任一可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器用于获取上行 SPS 传输的周期偏移量, 根据所述周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行 偏移。
结合第五方面的第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第十五种可 能的实现方式中: 所述处理器用于获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由所 述第二参考上下行比例配置和所述上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输 的周期偏移量。
结合第五方面的第十五种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第十六种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置为所述下行 HARQ定时参 考的上下行比例配置、 所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述 第一参考上下行比例配置中上行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一种。
结合第五方面的第十四种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第十七种可 能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置为 UE获取的 TDD上下行 比例配置集合中上行子帧最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。
结合第五方面的第十五种至第十七种任一可能的实现方式, 在第五方 面的第十八种可能的实现方式中: 所述第二参考上下行比例配置在协议中 固定配置或预配置。
第六方面, 提供一种用户设备, 所述用户设备包括处理器和存储器, 所述处理器与所述存储器电连接, 其中: 所述处理器用于在 TDD帧的上下 行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行 属性是否发生变化, 在所述上下行属性发生变化时, 忽略所述 SPS传输; 所述存储器用于存储所述执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧集合。
结合第六方面, 在第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器 进一步用于判断所述 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输, 在所述 SPS传输为 SPS新数据传输, 响应后续的调度指令重新执行忽略的所述 SPS新数据传 输。
结合第六方面, 在第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式中: 所述处理器 进一步用于将所述 SPS传输延迟至所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可 用子帧后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将所述 SPS传输提前至至所述上 下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧,其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
上述技术方案, 通过确定固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合中的每个 子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变, 在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。 通过这种方式, 能够实现动态 TDD上下行比例配置时 SPS的正 常执行。 能够实现动态配置 TDD上下行比例的情况下, SPS正常执行, 提 升 SPS性能。
附图说明
图 1是 TDD帧的结构示意图;
图 2是本申请半静态调度系统一个实施方式的结构示意图;
图 3是本申请半静态调度方法第一种实施方式的流程图; 图 4是本申请半静态调度方法第一种实施方式中确定 TDD帧中的固定 子帧集合可能的方案一的流程图;
图 5是本申请半静态调度方法第一种实施方式中确定 TDD帧中的固定 子帧集合可能的方案三的流程图;
图 6是本申请半静态调度方法第一种实施方式中确定 TDD帧中的固定 子帧集合可能的方案四的流程图;
图 7是本申请半静态调度方法第二种实施方式的流程图;
图 8是本申请半静态调度方法第三种实施方式中, 对上行 SPS传输的 传输周期进行偏移的流程图;
图 9是本申请半静态调度方法第四种实施方式的流程图;
图 10是本申请半静态调度方法第五种实施方式的流程图;
图 11是本申请用户设备第一种实施方式的结构示意图;
图 12是本申请用户设备第二种实施方式的结构示意图;
图 13是本申请用户设备第三种实施方式的结构示意图;
图 14是本申请基站第一种实施方式的结构示意图;
图 15是本申请基站第二种实施方式的结构示意图;
图 16是本申请用户设备第四种实施方式的结构示意图;
图 17是本申请用户设备第五种实施方式的结构示意图。 具体实施方式
以下描述中, 为了说明而不是为了限定, 提出了诸如特定系统结构、 接口、 技术之类的具体细节, 以便透彻理解本申请。 然而, 本领域的技术 在其它情况中, 省略对众所周知的装置、 电路以及方法的详细说明, 以免 不必要的细节妨碍本申请的描述。
系统中的时间域是由无线帧 ( Radio Frame )组成的, 无线帧通过系统 帧号 ( System Frame Number, SFN ) 进行标识, SFN是按周期对无线帧 进行轮循编号。 例如, 采用 10比特标记 SFN, 那么 =0、 1、 2...1023, 即 无线帧从 0编号到 1023后又从 0开始编号。 每个无线帧由 10个 1ms长度 的子帧( subframe )组成,每个无线帧内的子帧通过子帧号 nsbf标识, nsbf =0、 1、 2··.9。 因此, 在系统中, 一个子帧由系统帧号 和每个无线帧内的子帧 号¾/标识。 下面所提及的子帧 (包括上行子帧和下行子帧) 均如此。
作为 TDD系统的一个特点, 时间资源在上下行方向上进行分配。 TDD 帧结构支持 7种不同的上下行时间比例分配 (即配置 0~6)。 可以根据业务量 的特性进行配置。
当前的 TDD系统支持 7种上下行配比, 每种上下行配比的具体配置方 式如下表 1 :
表 1
Figure imgf000014_0001
其中, U表示为上行子帧, D表示下行子帧, S表示特殊子帧 (special subframe ), 主要用于下行传输。 本申请中把特殊子帧和下行子帧统称为下 行子帧。
SPS是一种半静态调度机制, 主要方法是通过 RRC消息为 UE配置一 套 SPS相关的参数, 以上行 SPS为例, 配置的参数可以包括 SPS的周期, 隐式释放上行 SPS的条件等; 以下行 SPS为例, 配置参数可以包括 SPS的 周期, 下行 SPS传输对应的上行反馈资源, 为 SPS预留的 HARQ进程数等 参数。 然后通过 SPS激活命令激活 SPS传输资源, UE根据该 SPS激活命 令周期性的使用 SPS传输资源进行 SPS传输。
目前, 为了更好的适应不同业务的变化, 为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比 例配置可能会动态改变。 在 TDD上下行比例配置变化时, 原来用于上行传 输的上行子帧可能会变成下行子帧, 或原来用于下行传输的下行子帧变为 上行子帧。 比如假设为 UE配置的是在上表中的 TDD上下行比例配置 0, 1 之间改变, 则在一个无线 LTE帧中子帧 0、 1、 2、 3、 5、 6、 7、 8的上下行 属性不变, 其中 0, 1 , 5, 6为下行子帧或特殊子帧, 可以称为下行子帧集 合或者固定下行子帧集合, 2, 3, 7, 8为上行子帧, 可以称为上行子帧子 集或者固定上行子帧集合; 子帧 4和 9可被用于为上行子帧或下行子帧, 为灵活子帧, 可以称为灵活子帧集合。 当 TDD上下行比例配置从 0变为 1 时, 由上表 1可知, 在 TDD上下行比例配置为 0下的子帧 4为上行子帧, 而在 TDD上下行比例配置为 1 下, 子帧 4变成下行子帧; 同样, 原来在 TDD上下行比例配置为 0下的子帧 9为上行子帧,而在 TDD上下行比例配 置为 1下, 子帧 9变为下行子帧。 这可能导致 SPS数据传输收到影响。
针对以上的分析,本申请提供了以下发明实施例, 能够在为 UE动态配 置 TDD上下行比例的情况下, 使 SPS不受灵活子帧的影响而正常传输。
参阅图 2, 图 2是本申请半静态调度系统一个实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式的半静态调度系统包括基站 110、 一个或多个用户设备 UE120, 其中, 基站 110的系统可以同时兼容多个 UE 120, 基站 110可分别与多个 UE 120通信。 可以通过基站 110为 UE120进行参数配置。
请参阅图 3, 图 3是本申请半静态调度方法第一种实施方式的流程图, 本实施方式以 UE作为执行主体为例进行说明,本实施方式的半静态调度的 方法可以包括:
S101: 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合中的每个子 帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变;
UE根据已为其配置的参数信息, 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合。 其 中, 可以通过基站或通过协议为 UE配置参数信息。 为 UE配置的参数信息 至少包括可能的 TDD上下行比例配置的集合,下行 HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request, 混合自动重传请求)定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, 上 行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, TDD上下行比例配置改变的 周期, 发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变命令的时刻等参数中的一项或多项。 为 UE配置的参数信息为上行 SPS的参数信息和下行 SPS的参数信息的其 中一种或两种的组合。 另外, 为 UE配置的参数信息还可以包括常规的 SPS配置参数, 比如 如果是为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息,则所述 SPS配置参数可以包括 SPS 的周期, 隐式释放上行 SPS的条件等中的一项或多项; 如果是为 UE配置 下行 SPS的参数信息,则所述 SPS配置参数可以包括 SPS的周期,下行 SPS 传输对应的上行反馈资源, 为 SPS预留的 HARQ进程数等参数。 其中可以 只通知 UE上行 SPS的参数信息, 或者只通知 UE下行 SPS的参数信息, 或者同时通知 UE上行和下行 SPS的参数信息。
这里的固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至 少一种, 其中固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生 动态变化时均是上行子帧, 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行 比例配置发生动态变化时均是下行子帧。
固定子帧集合中每个子帧的上下行属性, 在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置 发生动态变化时都不会发生变化。 比如针对 TDD的上下行比例配置在 {0, 1 }之间动态变化, 由上表 1 可知, 在配比 {0, 1 }下的子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}都 是下行子帧, 即 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}构成固定下行子帧集合, 而 {2, 3, 7, 8}都 是上行子帧, 即 {2, 3 , 7, 8}构成固定上行子帧集合。 又或者针对 TDD的 上下行比例配置在 { 1 , 2}之间动态变化, 由上表 1 可知, 在配比 { 1 , 2}下 的子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 9}都是下行子帧, 即 {0, 1 , 5 , 9}构成固定下行子帧集 合, 而 {2, 7}都是上行子帧, 即 {2, 7}构成固定上行子帧集合。
其中, 本实施方式提供确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合的四种可能的实 现方案:
方案一:
请参阅图 4, 图 4是本实施方式提供的确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合 可能的方案一的流程图, 本方案确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合包括以下步 骤:
S1011: 获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上下行比例配置集 合包括至少两个上下行比例配置;
UE可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取 TDD帧的上下 行比例配置集合, 这个上下行比例配置集合包括两个或多个上下行比例配 置。 比如可以是上表 1 中的比例配置 {0, 1 } , 或者是 { 1 , 2, 3} , 或者 {2, 3}等等。 即可以是上表 1 的上下行比例配置中的任意两个或多个的组合。 可选的, TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时,可能不需要基站 eNB通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息通知 UE所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。 可选的, 上下行比例配置集合还 可以包含未在上表 1 中的上下行比例配置中的上下行比例配置, 在本发明 中不做限制。
S1012: 确定上下行属性在至少两个上下行比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成固定子帧集合。
根据获取的 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 可以确定固定子帧集合在 一个长期演进(LTE, Long Term Evolution )无线帧中具体包含哪些子帧。 例如, 假设为 UE配置的 TDD帧上下行比例配置集合是上表 1 中的 TDD 上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则 UE可以确定在一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}为下行子帧, 即固定下行子帧集合, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上行子帧, 即固 定上行子帧集合。 虽然一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {4, 9}有可能被用于上行传 输, 但由于其也可能会被用于下行传输, 为灵活子帧。 所以不将其作为本 实施方式的固定子帧集合的子帧。也就是说, 在上下行比例配置 {0, 1 }下, 如果是为 UE配置下行 SPS的参数信息,则 UE确定 SPS传输只能使用 {0, 1 , 5, 6}子帧中的一个或多个, 而如果是为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息, 则 UE确定 SPS传输只能使用 {2, 3, 7, 8}子帧中的一个或多个。 假设为 UE配置的 TDD帧上下行比例配置集合是 { 1 , 2} , 则 UE可以确定在一个 LTE无线帧中 {0, 1 , 5, 9}为下行子帧, 即固定下行子帧集合, {2, 7}为 上行子帧, 即固定上行子帧集合。 在上下行比例配置 { 1 , 2}下, 针对下行 SPS, UE确定 SPS传输只能在 {0, 1 , 5, 9}子帧中的一个或多个, 针对上 行 SPS, UE确定 SPS传输只能在 {2, 7}子帧中的一个或两个。
方案二:
在方案二中, UE获取指示信息, 这个指示信息直接指定固定子帧集合 中的子帧。 也就是说, UE不需要通过上下行比例配置集合确定固定子帧集 合, 而直接采用指定的固定子帧集合中的子帧进行 SPS传输。 这里指定固 定子帧集合中的子帧可以是由 TDD上下行比例配置集合获得的固定子帧集 合中的一个或多个子帧。 为 UE配置下行 SPS时, 这个指定固定子帧集合 中的子帧可以是配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合得到的固定下行子帧集合 中的一个或多个子帧, 上行 SPS类似。 UE可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC 消息或其它消息获取所述指示信息。
例如,假设为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD 上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则在一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}为下行 子帧, 即固定下行子帧集合, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上行子帧, 即固定上行子帧 集合。 这时, 如果是为 UE配置下行 SPS的参数信息, 则指示信息可以直 接指定固定子帧集合中的子帧为 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}中的一个或多个子帧, 如 {0, 1 } , 或 {0, 5} , 或 {0, 1 , 6}等。 如果是为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息, 则指示信息可以直接指定固定子帧集合的子帧为 {2, 3, 7, 8}中的一个或 多个子帧, 如 {2, 3} , 或 {3, 8} , 或 {2, 7, 8}等。 对于其他的上下行比例 配置集合类似, 本实施方式不——举例说明。
方案三:
请参阅图 5, 图 5是本实施方式提供的确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合 可能的方案三的流程图, 本方案确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合包括以下步 骤:
S1021: 获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置;
第一参考上下行比例配置可以是一个或多个, 而且, 上行或下行 SPS 参考的第一参考上下行比例配置可以不同。 具体的, 第一参考上下行比例 配置可以包括下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置以及上行 HARQ 定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的至少一种。比如当为 UE配置下行 SPS 参数时,第一参考上下行比例配置可以是上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下 行比例配置, 当为 UE配置上行 SPS参数时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可 以是下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。
UE可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取所述第一参考 上下行比例配置。
其中,下行 SPS参考的第一参考上下行比例配置,可以是通过 SIB1 (第 一系统信息块, System Information Block 1 )通知到 UE。 具体的, 所述第 一参考上下行比例配置是 SIB1中的 TDD上下行比例配置。
其中, 可选的, UE上行 SPS传输所参考的第一参考上下行比例配置可 以为预配置的上下行比例配置, 此时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以在协 议中固定配置或者预配置, 可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
S1022: 由第一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形成固定子帧 集合。
由第一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形成固定子帧集合。 其中固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种。
当上行 SPS与下行 SPS分别采用不同的第一参考上下行比例配置时, 针对上行 SPS, 由上行 SPS参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定 上行子帧集合, 针对下行 SPS, 由下行 SPS参考的上下行比例配置中的下 行子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。
当上行 SPS与下行 SPS采用同一个第一参考上下行比例配置时, 由第 一参考上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 固定上行子 帧集合中的子帧在上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均是上行子帧, 由第一 参考上下行比例配置中的下行子帧形成固定下行子帧集合, 固定下行子帧 集合中的子帧在上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均是下行子帧。
为进一步详细说明, 以下通过举例说明:
假设为 UE配置的上下行比例配置集合为 {0, 1 } , 上行 HARQ定时参 考的上下行比例配置为 0, 此时如为 UE配置下行 SPS参数信息, 则第一参 考上下行比例配置可以为 0, UE根据第一参考上下行比例配置 0可以确定 用于下行 SPS的下行子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}形成固定下行子帧集合(根据根据 上表 1 , TDD上下行比例配置 0的 {0, 1 , 5, 6}子帧为下行子帧)。 即在第 一参考上下行比例配置 0下, UE可以使用一个 LTE无线帧中的 {0, 1 , 5, 6}子帧中的一个或多个进行 SPS传输。 若为 UE配置的上下行比例配置集 合为 {0, 1 } , 下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置为 1 , 此时如为 UE 配置上行 SPS参数信息, 则第一参考上下行比例配置可以为 1 , UE根据第 一参考上下行比例配置 1可以确定用于上行 SPS的上行子帧 {2, 3, 7, 8} 形成固定下行子帧集合(根据根据上表 1 , TDD上下行比例配置 1的 {2, 3, 7, 8}子帧为上行子帧)。 即第一参考上下行比例配置 1下, UE可以使用一 个 LTE无线帧中的 {2, 3, 7, 8}子帧中的一个或多个进行 SPS传输。
假设为 UE配置的上下行比例配置集合为 {0, 1 } , 下行 HARQ定时参 考的上下行比例配置为 2, 此时如为 UE配置上行 SPS参数信息, 则第一参 考上下行比例配置可以为 2, UE根据第一参考上下行比例配置 2可以确定 用于上行 SPS的上行子帧 {2, 7}形成固定下行子帧集合(根据根据上表 1 , TDD上下行比例配置 2的 {2, 7}子帧为上行子帧)。 即第一参考上下行比例 配置 2下, UE可以使用一个 LTE无线帧中的 {2, 7}子帧中的一个或多个进 行 SPS传输。
方案四:
请参阅图 6, 图 6是本实施方式提供的确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合 可能的方案四的流程图, 本方案确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合包括以下步 骤:
S1031: 获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上下行比例配置集 合包括至少两个上下行比例配置;
UE可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取 TDD帧的上下 行比例配置集合, 这个上下行比例配置集合包括两个或多个上下行比例配 置。 比如可以是上表 1 中的比例配置 {0, 1 } , 或者是 { 1 , 2, 3} , 或者 {2, 3 }等等。 即可以是上表 1 的上下行比例配置中的任意两个或多个的组合, 或者也可以包含上表 1中没有的上下行比例配置。 可选的, TDD帧的上下 行比例配置集合可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时, 可能不需要 eNB 通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息通知 UE所述 TDD帧的上下行比 例配置集合。
S1032:从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传 输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 并由选择的上下行比例配置 中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成固定子帧集合。
UE可以根据选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少 的上下行比例配置的指示信息, 从获取的至少两个上下行比例配置中选择 上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 确定与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成固定子帧集合。 针对下行 SPS 传输, 从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择下行子帧数最少的上下行比例配 置, 以该上下行比例配置下获取的下行子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。 针对 上行 SPS传输, 从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上行子帧数最少的上下 行比例配置, 以该上下行比例配置下获取的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集 合。
比如假设为 UE配置的上下行比例配置集合是 {0, 1 } , 则由上表 1可知 TDD上下行比例配置 0中一个 LTE无线帧中的下行子帧(含特殊子帧)数 最少(上下行比例配置 0下为 {0, 1 , 5, 6} , 上下行比例配置 1下为 {0, 1 , 4, 5, 6, 9 } ), 则 UE下行 SPS传输可以使用 TDD上下行比例配置 0中的 下行子帧。 如果为 UE配置的上下行比例配置集合为 { 1 , 2} , 则由表 1可知 上下行比例配置 1中一个 LTE无线帧中的下行子帧最少, 则 UE下行 SPS 传输可以使用上下行配置 1中的下行子帧。针对上行 SPS传输, UE可以参 考 TDD上下行比例配置集合下一个 LTE无线帧中上行子帧数最少的 TDD 上下行比例配置, 假设 TDD上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下 行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则由上表 1可知 TDD上下行比例配置 1中一个 LTE无 线帧中的上行子帧数最少 (上下行比例配置 0 下为 {2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9} , 上下行比例配置 1下为 {2, 3, 7, 8} ), 则 UE上行 SPS传输可以使用 TDD 上下行比例配置 1 中的上行子帧。 针对其他的上下行比例配置集合, 依此 类推。
S102: 在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的 子帧上执行 SPS传输。
具体地, 在固定上行子帧集合中的子帧上进行上行 SPS传输, 或者在 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧上进行下行 SPS传输。以 TDD上下行比例配置 集合是上表 1中的 {0, 1 }为例,假设是通过上述方案一确定固定子帧集合。 假设配置的是下行 SPS, SPS周期为 20ms (—个子帧长度为 1ms ), 激活 SPS传输的时刻是 0, 则 UE执行下行 SPS传输的时刻为 0, 20, 40....。 即 UE在 0, 20, 40....分别在对应的下行子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}上执行 SPS传输。
其中, 本实施方式的半静态调度方法还可以包括: 从固定子帧集合中 与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控 制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令 或 SPS释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。 所述 SPS控制指令可以指示 UE 进行 SPS传输所使用的物理资源、 调制编码方式、 SPS传输时刻等信息中 的一个或多个的组合。 用于获取 SPS控制指令的子帧为固定子帧集合中能 够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。 具体的, 所述从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制 指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令指 UE在所述子帧上接收 以 SPS C-RNTI加掩的 PDCCH控制指令。
针对 SPS控制指令用于指示 SPS激活时,即 SPS控制指令为 SPS激活 指令。 UE从 SPS激活指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS激活指令进 而激活用于 SPS传输的子帧。其中上行 SPS和下行 SPS的 SPS激活指令都 只能从下行子帧中获取。
每个子帧的 SPS激活指令只能在可以调度该子帧的下行子帧上传输。 通常, 下行调度命令传输和下行数据传输在同一个子帧, 即下行 SPS激活 指令可以激活传输所述 SPS激活指令的子帧中的下行 SPS传输, 后续 SPS 传输可以周期性的发生。 以上行为例, SPS 激活指令只能在可以调度对应 上行子帧的下行子帧上传输,通常上行调度命令传输在上行数据传输之前 K 个子帧, 其中 K值根据不同的 TDD上下行比例配置而不同, 比如 K可以 为 4, 6等。 比如针对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }上行 SPS的上行子帧 2的 SPS激 活指令, 如果 K取 6, 那么子帧 2的 SPS激活指令只能在上一个帧的下行 子帧 6上传输(子帧 2之前的第 6个下行子帧为上一个帧的下行子帧 6 )。 针对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }的下行子帧 1的 SPS激活命令和通过下行子帧 1 传输的数据都在下行子帧 1上传输, 下行子帧 5的 SPS激活指令和通过下 行子帧 5传输的数据都在下行子帧 5上传输。 依此类推。
事实上, 对于 UE来说, 只在 SPS激活指令能够传输的时刻监听 SPS 激活指令,或者 UE在其它时刻不监听 SPS激活指令,或者 UE在其它时刻 监听到 SPS激活指令后, 忽略 SPS激活指令。 具体的, 以 TDD上下行比例 配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下行比例配置 {0, 1 }为例, 假设通过上述方 案一确定固定子帧集合, 则下行 SPS传输的时刻可以是 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}子帧, 下行 SPS激活指令也只能是一个 LTE无线帧中的 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}子帧传输, 或者在其它子帧不传输。
上述的 SPS激活指令, 对于已经激活的子帧, 如果再次接收到 SPS激 活指令, 这个 SPS激活指令也可以认为是 SPS修改指令。
当在某个子帧上的数据传输已经完成, 可以通过接收 SPS调度指令释 放通过所述 SPS激活指令分配的资源, 以用于后面数据的调度, 避免资源 浪费。 这时候, SPS调度指令用于指示 SPS释放时, 可以被称为 SPS释放 指令。
可选的, SPS释放指令可以在能够调度对应子帧的下行子帧上传输。 以上行为例, SPS 释放指令只能在可以调度对应上行子帧的下行子帧 上传输。 比如针对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }上行 SPS的上行子帧 2的 SPS释放 指令, 如果 K取 6, 那么子帧 2的 SPS释放指令只能在上一个帧的下行子 帧 6上传输(子帧 2之前的第 6个下行子帧为上一个帧的下行子帧 6 )。 针 对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }的下行子帧 1的 SPS释放指令在下行子帧 1上传输, 下行子帧 5的 SPS释放指令在下行子帧 5上传输。 依此类推。
进一步可选的, SPS释放指令也可以在能够调度实际使用的 SPS传输 时刻上传输。 具体的, 以上下行比例配置集合是 {0, 1 }为例, 假设通过上 述方式一确定固定子帧集合, 如配置的是下行 SPS的参数信息, SPS周期 为 20ms (—个子帧长度为 1ms ), 则假设激活 SPS传输的时刻是 0, 则 UE 执行下行 SPS传输的时刻为 0, 20, 40.... , 则 SPS释放指令可以在 20, 40 等能够调度实际使用的 SPS传输时刻上传输。
可选的, 由于确定固定子帧集合后,可以确定 UE具体可以在哪些子帧 上进行 SPS传输, 所以 SPS激活指令可以不限制在固定下行子帧, 而是可 以在任意下行子帧, 包括固定子帧和灵活子帧进行传输, 因此 SPS激活指 令可以指示最近下一次可用的子帧上进行 SPS传输。 这样, 在所指示的最 近下一次可用的子帧进行 SPS传输之前, eNB可以多次发送 SPS激活指令, 以提升 SPS激活指令的可靠性, 此时, 如果 UE已经接收到一个 SPS激活 指令, 当 UE再次接收到相同的 SPS激活指令时, UE可以应用其中的任意 一个 SPS激活指令。 具体的, UE可以忽略或丟弃后面接收到到相同的 SPS 激活指令。 同样的, SPS释放指令也可以做类似处理。
可选的, 所述 SPS传输可以包含上行或下行 SPS新数据传输, 上行或 下行 SPS重传数据传输, 或 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令可以包括上 行或下行 SPS激活指令、 上行或下行 SPS新传输数据块指令、 上行或下行 SPS重传数据块指令,或者上行或下行 SPS 释放指令中的一种或多种组合。 即本发明实施例中确定的 SPS传输时刻可以应用于 SPS数据传输或者 SPS 控制指令传输。 通过上述实施方式的描述, 可以理解, 本申请实施方式提供的半静态 调度方法, 通过确定固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上 下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变, 在固定子 帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。 通过这种方式, 能够实现 TDD动态上下行比例配置时 SPS的正常执行, 提 示 SPS性能, 减少 UE执行 SPS的复杂度。
上述实施方式的半静态调度方法主要用于 SPS传输上。 本申请的半静 态调度方法还可以用于 SPS传输的反馈传输中。 请参阅图 7, 图 7是本申 请半静态调度方法第二种实施方式的流程图,本实施方式以 UE作为执行主 体来进行描述, 本实施方式的半静态调度方法包括以下步骤:
S201: 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合中的每个子 帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变;
UE根据已为其配置的参数信息, 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合。 其 中可以通过基站或协议为 UE配置参数信息。为 UE配置的参数信息至少包 括可能的 TDD上下行比例配置的集合, 下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下 行比例配置, 上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, TDD上下行 比例配置改变的周期, 发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变指令的时刻等参数中 的一项或多项。 为 UE配置的参数信息为上行 SPS的参数信息和下行 SPS 的参数信息的其中一种或两种的组合。
确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合的可能实现方案跟上述实施方式提供的 四种可能的实现方案相同。
比如上行 SPS传输对应的下行反馈传输的固定下行子帧集合可以由参 考的 TDD上下行比例配置下的固定下行子帧组成。下行 SPS传输对应的上 行反馈传输的固定上行子帧集合可以由参考的 TDD上下行比例配置下的固 定上行子帧组成。 这里的参考的 TDD上下行比例配置可以是上述实施方式 所述的第一参考上下行比例配置, 也可以不是。
这里参考的 TDD上下行比例配置可以是下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD 上下行比例配置、上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置的至少一种。 比如当为 UE配置下行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输时, 可以使用上行 HARQ 定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, 当为 UE配置上行 SPS传输对应的反馈 传输时, 可以使用下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。
eNB可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息将上述 TDD上下 行比例配置集合通知 UE。
可选的, UE上行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例 配置可以为 SIB1中通知的 TDD上下行比例配置。 这时, 上行 SPS传输对 应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例配置在协议中预配置或固定配置, 这时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, UE下行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例 配置可以为预配置的 TDD上下行比例配置如 2, 5, 此时, 上行 SPS传输 对应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例配置信息可以在协议中固定配置 或者预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
S202: 在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈传输的 传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
具体地, 在固定上行子帧集合中的子帧上进行下行 SPS传输对应的反 馈传输, 或者在固定下行子帧集合中的子帧上进行上行 SPS传输对应的反 馈传输。
本实施方式的半静态调度方法还可以包括, 从固定子帧集合中与 SPS 控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令 包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS 释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。所述 SPS控制指令可以指示 UE进行 SPS 传输所使用的物理资源、 调制编码方式、 SPS 传输时刻等信息中的一个或 多个的组合。用于获取 SPS控制指令的子帧为固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS 传输的下行子帧。 具体的, 所述从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输 方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS 控制指令指 UE 在所述子帧上接收以 SPS C-RNTI加掩的 PDCCH控制指令。具体的实现过程跟上述实施方式的相同, 在此不再赘述。
上述本申请的半静态调度方法的第一种实施方式和第二种实施方式可 以相互结合, 即在 SPS传输和 SPS对应的反馈传输时都可以用于本申请的 半静态调度方法。
在 TDD 系统中, 为了避免 SPS 新数据传输和重传数据在同一个 TTI(Transmission Time Interval , 传输时间间隔)出现沖突, 上行 SPS在不同 TDD上下行比例配置下, 周期可能会有一个偏移量。
不同 TDD上下行比例配置, 上行 SPS周期的偏移量可以参见下表 2:
表 2:
Figure imgf000026_0001
由 TDD上下行比例配置和上表 2, 结合以下公式 1 , 就可以计算出上 行 SPS传输激活后每次 SPS传输的具体时刻:
T =[ ( 10 X S+Q ) +N X C]+V X ( N mod 2 ) ] mod 10240 (公式 1 ) 其中, T表示 SPS传输的时刻, S表示激活 SPS传输后首次进行 SPS 传输的无线帧的编号, Q表示激活 SPS传输后首次进行 SPS传输的子帧编 号, N表示第几个周期,即第几次 SPS传输, N=0可以表示首次 SPS传输, N=l表示第二次 SPS传输, C表示周期, V表示偏移量, mod是模数, N mod 2表示 N除以 2取余数的意思, 后面 mod 10240是为了归一化。
以下通过举例说明具体如何计算每次 SPS传输的具体时刻:
例如假设上行 SPS的周期 C为 10ms, 上行 SPS传输激活的时间 Q为 子帧 2, 默认从第 0个无线帧开始, 即 S为 0, TDD上下行比例配置为 1 下的子帧 2的偏移量 V为 1 , 激活时间开始第一次传输为第 0个周期, 则 激活时间开始第一次传输的时刻 T=[(10 0+2)+0 10+1 (0 mod 2)]mod 10240=2 ,针对激活时间开始后的其他传输的时刻也同样依据以上公式计算。 则根据上述公式, 可以计算出 SPS传输从激活时间开始, 每次传输发生的 时间为: 2, 13 , 22, 33 , …。
如果将上述上行 SPS传输激活的时间 Q改为子帧 3 , 其它参数不变, 则根据上述公式, 可以计算出 SPS传输从激活时间开始, 每次传输发生的 时间为: 3 , 12, 23 , 32, …。
由于上行 SPS在不同 TDD上下行比例配置下,周期的偏移量可能会有 不同。为适应 TDD上下行比例配置动态变化而更好的实现 SPS的正常执行, 本申请半静态调度方法中, 在上行子帧上执行上行 SPS传输时, 可以对上 行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
因此, 本申请半静态调度方法的第三种实施方式中, 进一步提供一种 对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移的方法。 通过对上行 SPS传输的传输 周期进行偏移, 能够有效避免 SPS新数据传输与重传数据在同一个 ΤΉ中 出现沖突。
请参阅图 8, 图 8是本申请半静态调度方法第三种实施方式中, 对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移的流程图, 包括以下步骤:
S3011 : 获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量;
其中, 本实施方式中, 获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量可以具体通过 获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由该第二参考上下行比例配置与具体的 用于上行 SPS传输的子帧确定该子帧的上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量。 比如 获取的第二参考上下行比例配置为 1 , 针对子帧 2的上行 SPS传输的周期 偏移量由上表 2可知为 1。 或获取的第二参考上下行比例配置为 3 , 针对子 帧 4的上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量由上表 2可知为 -2。 这里的第二参考上 下行比例配置可以跟上述实施方式提到的第一参考上下行比例配置相同, 也可以不同。
第二参考上下行比例配置可以是为 UE配置的参数信息中的下行
HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配 置、 第一参考上下行比例配置中上行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一 种。具体地, 比如为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息时,可以使用下行 HARQ 定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是通过广 播消息或者 RRC消息或其它消息进行配置。
可选的, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是预配置的 TDD上下行比例配 置, 此时, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此 时, 可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比 例集合中一个 LTE帧中上行子帧数最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。假设 TDD 上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则由上表
1可知 TDD上下行比例配置 1中一个 LTE无线帧中的上行子帧数最少, 第 二参考上下行比例配置为 1。
第二参考上下行比例配置可以是通过广播消息或者专用 RRC消息进行 配置。可选的,第二参考上下行比例配置可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, 本实施方式中, 获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量还可以具体 通过获取偏移量的具体信息来获得, 比如通过广播消息或者专用 RRC消息 配置具体哪个或哪些子帧使用哪个或哪些偏移量的信息。 UE根据此配置信 息执行周期偏移。可选的,所述具体信息可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
S3012: 根据周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
根据周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。 根据偏移量以 及上述公式 1 , 可以计算得到进行传输周期偏移后的上行 SPS传输的具体 时刻, 在这个计算得到的具体时刻上进行新数据传输。
例如假设第二参考上下行比例配置为 1 , 上行 SPS的周期 C为 10ms, 上行 SPS传输激活的时间 Q为子帧 2, 默认从第 0个无线帧开始, 即 S为
0, TDD上下行比例配置为 1下的子帧 2的偏移量 V为 1 , 则根据上述公式
1 , 可以计算出 SPS传输从激活时间开始,每次传输发生的时间为: 2, 13, 22, 33, ...。 而针对每个传输失败而出现的重传数据发送的时间分别为: 12, 23, 32, 43, …。 这样, 避免了重传数据和新传输数据在同一个 TTI 发生沖突。
同样,假设第二参考上下行比例配置为 1 ,上行 SPS的周期 C为 10ms, 上行 SPS传输激活的时间 Q为子帧 3, 默认从第 0个无线帧开始, 即 S为 0, TDD上下行比例配置为 1下的子帧 3的偏移量 V为- 1 ,则根据上述公式
1 , 可以计算出 SPS传输从激活时间开始,每次传输发生的时间为: 3, 12, 23, 32, ...。 而针对每个传输失败而出现的重传数据发送的时间分别为: 13, 22, 33, 42··.„
本申请实施方式通过固定的第二参考上下行比例配置, 能够确定某个 上行子帧的 SPS周期偏移量, 根据这个 SPS周期偏移量对该上行 SPS传输 的传输周期进行偏移。 从而有效避免 SPS新数据传输与重传数据在同一个 ΤΉ中出现沖突。
本实施方式的上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移的方法可以单独使用, 也可以应用到上述半静态调度方法第一种或第二种实施方式中, 或者第一 种和第二种实施方式结合的实施方式中。
请参阅图 9,图 9是本申请半静态调度方法的第四种实施方式的流程图, 该实施方式以基站作为执行主体, 本实施方式半静态调度方法包括:
S301:基站为 UE配置能够确定固定子帧集合的参数信息,其中固定子 帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变 化时保持不变;
基站为 UE配置的参数信息包括指示信息, 还至少包括可能的 TDD上 下行比例配置的集合、下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置、 TDD 上下行比例配置改变的周期、发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变指令的时刻等 参数中的一项或多项。其中,指示信息用于指示 UE采用何种方式确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合。本实施方式提供基站通知 UE的指示信息以下几种可 能的情况:
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用配置 TDD上下行比例配置集合确 定固定子帧集合。 UE则通过获取 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 由 TDD帧的 上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为上行子帧的子帧形成固定上行子帧集 合, 由 TDD帧上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧的子帧形成固 定下行子帧集合。
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用配置的指示信息直接指定的固定 子帧集合。 基站根据为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 确定固定子 帧集合或固定子帧集合的一个或多个子集。 直接通过指示信息指定固定子 帧集合中的子帧。 比如假设为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合是 {0, 1 } , 则在一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}为下行子帧或特殊子帧, 即 固定下行子帧子集, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上行子帧, 即固定上行子帧子集。 此 时, 如果为 UE配置的是下行 SPS配置参数, 则基站可以通过指示信息直 接指定固定子帧集合可以为 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}中的一个或多个子帧组成的集合, 如 {0, 1 }或 { 1 , 5, 6}等, 如果为 UE配置的是上行 SPS配置参数, 则基站 可以通过指示信息直接指定固定子帧集合可以为 {2, 3, 7, 8}中的一个或 多个子帧组成的集合, 如 {2, 3}或 {7, 8}。
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置确定 固定子帧集合, 这时基站通知 UE指示信息的同时, 还为 UE配置至少一个 参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。 UE通过这个参考的 TDD上下行比例配置来 确定固定子帧集合。上行 SPS与下行 SPS可以分别采用不同的参考的 TDD 上下行比例配置,也可以使用同一个参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。上行 SPS 可以使用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合 , 下行 SPS可以使用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的下行子帧形成固定下行 子帧集合。
其中参考的 TDD上下行比例配置可以包括下行 HARQ定时参考的上下 行比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的至少一种。 当 为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息时使用下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例 配置, 当为 UE配置下行 SPS的参数信息时使用上行 HARQ定时参考的上 下行比例配置。
比如基站通知 UE是采用配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合中上下行属 性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置确定固定子 帧集合。 这时, 基站可以为 UE配置一个 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 以使 UE根据这个 TDD上下行比例配置集合找到上下行属性与 SPS传输方向相 同的子帧最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。
S302: 将参数信息通知 UE。
上述基站为 UE配置的参数信息, 可以通过系统广播消息中通知 UE, 也可以通过专用 RRC消息如 RRC重配置消息或其它消息通知 UE, 或者这 两者的结合。 即一部分参数信息通过系统广播消息中通知 UE, 另一部分参 数信息通过专用 RRC消息如 RRC重配置消息或其它消息通知 UE。 当有部 分或全部参数信息通过专用 RRC消息通知 UE时, UE可以向基站发送 RRC 完成消息。
请参阅图 10,图 10是本申请半静态调度方法第五种实施方式的流程图, 本实施方式的半静态调度方法包括以下步骤:
S401: TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化;
在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 执行 S402。
S402:判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化; 在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否也发生变化。 比如 TDD的上下行比例配置 在 {0,1 }之间动态变化, 当从 0变为 1时, 子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}的都为下行子 帧, 子帧 {2, 3, 7, 8}都为上行子帧, 而子帧 4由 TDD上下行比例配置为 0时的上行子帧变为上下行比例配置为 1时的下行子帧, 子帧 9由 TDD上 下行比例配置 0时的上行子帧变为上下行比例配置为 1时的下行子帧。 因 此, 在从 TDD上下行比例由 0变为 1时, 子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}和子帧 {2, 3, 7, 8}的上下行属性没有发生变化, 子帧 {4, 9}的上下行属性发生了变化。
在执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性发生变化时,执行 S403。 S403: 忽略该 SPS传输。
忽略上下行属性发生变化的子帧上的 SPS传输。
作为一种优选的实现方式, 本实施方式的半静态调度方法还可以包括 进一步判断忽略的 SPS传输是否为新数据传输, 在判断到忽略的 SPS传输 是新数据传输时, 进一步响应后续的调度指令重新执行该忽略的 SPS新数 据传输。
另一种优选的实现方式, 本实施方式的半静态调度方法还可以进一步 包括将忽略的 SPS传输延迟至上下行属性发生变化的 SPS可用子帧后面的 第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将忽略的 SPS传输提前至上下行属性发生变化 的 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧,其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
其中, W、 M可以通过 RRC消息配置, 或者提前预配置, 如 W=l , 则 指 UE将忽略的 SPS传输时刻延迟到下一个可用的时刻。 例如, 某个上行 SPS传输时刻变成下行后, UE将 SPS传输时刻延迟到下一个上行时刻。 如 M=l , 则指 UE将忽略的 SPS传输时刻提前到下一个可用的时刻。
例如下表 3所示, 假设 UE的 TDD上下行比例配置集合为 {0, 1 } , 在 配比 0下, UE的某个上行 SPS传输为子帧 4, 则当配比改成 1后, 子帧 4 的传输方向变为下行, UE可以忽略该上行 SPS的传输, 然后 UE可以将该 忽略的 SPS传输延迟到下一个上行子帧 7 (当 W=l时 ), 或者将该忽略的 SPS传输提前到上一个上行子帧 3 ( M=l )。 下行类似, 不再赘述。
表 3:
Figure imgf000032_0001
本实施方式的半静态调度方法, 通过 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动 态变化时,判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化, 在上下行属性发生变化时忽略上下行属性发生变化的子帧上的 SPS传输。 通过这样的方式,提供一种因 TDD上下行比例配置发生变化,用于执行 SPS 传输的某些可用子帧的上下行属性也发生变化时对 SPS数据传输的一种处 理方式。
另外, 本实施方式的半静态调度方法, 进一步提供对忽略的 SPS传输 的处理方式, 即当忽略的 SPS传输是 SPS新数据传输时, 进一步响应后续 的调度指令重新传输该忽略的 SPS传输, 从而能够确保忽略的 SPS新数据 传输中的数据丟失。
更进一步地, 可以通过将忽略的 SPS传输延迟到后面某个可用子帧或 提前到前面某个可用子帧上进行传输。 这样, 能有效避免因为子帧上下行 属性发生变化而导致数据丟失, 提升 SPS传输性能和可靠性。
目前的研究还发现 UE在固定上行子帧的干扰和 UE在灵活上下子 帧的干扰差别非常大。
在 LTE无线通信系统中, 当终端满足预设的触发条件和一定的上报条 件时会向基站上报功率余量, 称为功率余量上报 (Power Headroom Report, PHR)。 PHR用于将终端的最大发射功率与估计的上行传输功率之差上报给 基站, 以便使基站根据上报的功率余量对终端进行功率控制和上行调度。
现有技术中, PHR上报的触发主要包括以下几种情况: 1、 周期 PHR 定时器到时; 2、 禁止上报 PHR定时器到时或超时, 且从上一次 PHR上报 后路损变化超过一定门限; 3、 上行辅载波激活, 等等。 通常 PHR的参数 配置可以包括周期 PHR定时器( Periodic PHR-Timer ) , 禁止上报 PHR定 时器( Prohibit PHR-Timer ) , 下行路损变化量( dl-Pathloss Change )三个 RRC配置参数。
然而针对现有技术中 PHR上报的触发条件, 都是终端根据基站为小区 静态配置 TDD配比信息的前提下发送的固定子帧的 PHR上报, 获取的信 息具有一定的局限性, 因此针对基站为小区动态配置 TDD配比信息的应用 场景可能需要新的 PHR上报的触发方法和上报, 以便基站更准确的进行上 行调度。
本发明实施例方案包括, 在动态 TDD上下行比例配置下我们可以针对 不同的子帧集合设置不同的 PHR参数集合。
具体实施例方法可以包括:
步骤 501 , UE接收第一 PHR参数和第二 PHR参数, 其中, 所述第一 PHR参数包括第一周期 PHR定时器,第一禁止上报 PHR定时器, 第一下行 路损变化量中的至少一个, 所述第一 PHR参数应用于固定子帧集合。 所述 第二 PHR参数包括第二周期 PHR定时器, 第二禁止上报 PHR定时器, 第 二下行路损变化量中的至少一个,所述第二 PHR参数应用于灵活子帧集合。
所述第一 PHR参数和第二 PHR参数可以是基站通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息通知给 UE, 或者预配置的, 在此不作限定。
进一步可选的, UE接收第三 PHR参数, 所述第三参数包括第三周期 PHR定时器, 第三禁止上报 PHR定时器, 第三下行路损变化量中的至少一 个。 其中, 所述第三 PHR参数是所述第一 PHR参数和第二 PHR参数中都 没有包含的参数。第三 PHR参数可以与第一 PHR参数结合应用于固定子帧 集合的 PHR, 第三 PHR参数也可以与第二 PHR参数结合应用于灵活子帧 集合的 PHR。 也就是说, 固定子帧集合的 PHR和灵活子帧集合的 PHR可 以部分采用其各自的 PHR参数的同时, 另一部分同时参考第三 PHR参数。 所述第三 PHR参数可以是基站通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它 消息通知给 UE, 或者预配置的, 在此不作限定。
步骤 502 , UE应用接收到的所述第一 PHR参数和所述第二 PHR参数, 触发固定子帧集合和 /或灵活子帧集合的 PHR。
具体的, 比如, 当所述第一周期 PHR定时器超时后, 触发固定子帧集 合的 PHR, 当所述固定子帧集合的 PHR被发送后, 再次启动所述第一周期 PHR定时器; 当所述第二周期 PHR定时器超时后, 触发灵活子帧集合的 PHR, 当所述灵活子帧集合的 PHR被发送后, 再次启动所述第二周期 PHR 定时器。
进一步可选的, UE应用接收到的所述第三 PHR参数, 分别触发固定 子帧集合和 /或灵活子帧集合的 PHR。
具体的, 比如所述第三 PHR参数包括第三下行路损变化量时, 所述触 发固定子帧集合和 /或灵活子帧集合的 PHR均以所述第三下行路损变化量 的值为参考。 当所述第三 PHR参数包括第三周期 PHR定时器时,所述触发 固定子帧集合和 /或灵活子帧集合的 PHR均以所述第三周期 PHR定时器的 值为参考。
通过为 UE配置针对固定子帧集合和 /或灵活子帧集合的不同的 PHR参 数, 可以实现固定子帧集合和 /或灵活子帧集合的 PHR分别及时触发,从而 更有效的辅助基站调度。
请参阅图 11 ,图 11是本申请用户设备的第一种实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式的用户设备 100包括确定模块 11和第一执行模块 12, 其中: 确定模块 11用于确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合 中的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保 持不变;
确定模块 11根据已为其配置的参数信息, 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧 集合。 可以通过基站或协议为 UE配置参数信息。 为 UE配置的参数信息至 少包括可能的 TDD上下行比例配置的集合, 下行 HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request, 混合自动重传请求)定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, 上 行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, TDD上下行比例配置改变的 周期, 发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变指令的时刻等参数中的一项或多项。 为 UE配置的参数信息为上行 SPS的参数信息和下行 SPS的参数信息的其 中一种或两种的组合。
另外, 为 UE配置的参数信息还可以包括常规的 SPS配置参数, 比如 如果是为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息,则所述 SPS配置参数可以包括 SPS 的周期, 隐式释放上行 SPS的条件等中的一项或多项; 如果是为 UE配置 下行 SPS的参数信息,则所述 SPS配置参数可以包括 SPS的周期,下行 SPS 传输对应的上行反馈资源, 为 SPS预留的 HARQ进程数等参数。 其中, 可 以只通知 UE上行 SPS的参数信息,或者只通知 UE下行 SPS的参数信息, 或者同时通知 UE上行和下行 SPS的参数信息。
这里的固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至 少一种, 其中固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生 动态变化时均是上行子帧, 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行 比例配置发生动态变化时均是下行子帧。
固定子帧集合中每个子帧的上下行属性, 在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置 发生动态变化时都不会发生变化。
其中, 本实施方式提供确定模块 11确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合有 四种可能的实现方案:
在方案一中, 确定模块 11用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上下行比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 确定上下行属性 在至少两个上下行比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成固定子帧集合。
确定模块 11可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取 TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合, 这个上下行比例配置集合包括两个或多个上下 行比例配置。 比如可以是上表 1中的比例配置 {0, 1 } , 或者是 { 1 , 2, 3 } , 或者 {2, 3}等等。 可选的, TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合可以在协议中固 定配置或预配置,此时,可能不需要通过 eNB通过广播消息或专用 RRC消 息或其它消息通知 UE所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。 可选的, 上下 行比例配置集合还可以包含未在上表 1中的上下行比例配置中的上下行比 例配置, 在本发明中不做限制。
确定模块 11根据获取的 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 可以确定固 定子帧集合在一个长期演进(LTE, Long Term Evolution )无线帧中具体包 含哪些子帧。 例如, 假设为 UE配置的 TDD帧上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则 UE可以确定在一个 LTE无线帧中 子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}为下行子帧, 即固定下行子帧集合, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上 行子帧, 即固定上行子帧集合。 虽然一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {4, 9}有可能 被用于上行传输, 但由于其也可能会被用于下行传输, 为灵活子帧。 所以 不将其作为实施方式的固定子帧集合的子帧。 也就是说, 在上下行比例配 置 {0, 1 }下, 如果是为 UE配置下行 SPS的参数信息, 则 UE确定 SPS传 输只能使用 {0, 1 , 5, 6}子帧中的一个或多个, 而如果是为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息, 则 UE确定 SPS传输只能使用 {2, 3, 7, 8}子帧中的一个 或多个。
在方案二中, 确定模块 11用于获取指示信息, 其中指示信息直接指定 所述固定子帧集合中的子帧。
确定模块 11获取指示信息, 这个指示信息直接指定固定子帧集合中的 子帧。 也就是说, UE不需要通过上下行比例配置集合确定固定子帧集合, 而直接采用指定的固定子帧集合中的子帧进行 SPS传输。 这里指定固定子 帧集合中的子帧可以是由 TDD上下行比例配置集合获得的固定子帧集合中 的一个或多个子帧。 为 UE配置下行 SPS时, 这个固定子帧集合中的子帧 可以是配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合得到的固定下行子帧集合中的一个 或多个子帧, 上行 SPS类似。 UE可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其 它消息获取所述指示信息。
例如,假设为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD 上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则在一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}为下行 子帧, 即固定下行子帧集合, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上行子帧, 即固定上行子帧 集合。 这时, 如果是为 UE配置下行 SPS的参数信息, 则指示信息可以直 接指示固定子帧集合中的子帧为 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}中的一个或多个子帧, 如 {0, 1 } , 或 {0, 5} , 或 {0, 1 , 6}等。 如果是为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息, 则指示信息可以直接指定固定子帧集合的子帧为 {2, 3, 7, 8}中的一个或 多个子帧, 如 {2, 3} , 或 {3, 8} , 或 {2, 7, 8}等。
在方案三中, 确定模块 11用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由第一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形成固定子帧集合。 固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种 , 其中固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化 时均是上行子帧, 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置 发生动态变化时均是下行子帧。
确定模块 11用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 第一参考上下 行比例配置可以是一个或多个。 可选的, 上行 SPS参考的第一参考上行比 例配置不同于下行 SPS参考的第一参考上下行比例配置。 当上行 SPS与下 行 SPS分别采用不同的第一参考上下行比例配置时, 针对上行 SPS, 由上 行 SPS参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 针对 下行 SPS, 由下行 SPS参考的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧形成固定下行 子帧集合。
当上行 SPS与下行 SPS采用同一个第一参考上下行比例配置时, 由第 一参考上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由第一 参考上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
可选的, 形成固定下行子帧集合所使用的第一参考上下行比例配置为
SIB1指示的比例配置。具体的,所述第一参考上下行比例配置是 SIB1中的 TDD上下行比例配置。
具体的, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以包括下行 HARQ 定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中 的至少一种。 比如当为 UE配置下行 SPS参数时, 第一参考上下行比例配 置可以是上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置,当为 UE配置上行 SPS参数时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以是下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD 上下行比例配置。 具体地, 确定模块 11用于获取至少一第一参考上下行比 例配置, 如果针对上行 SPS, 由下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中 的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 如果针对下行 SPS, 由上行 HARQ定 时参考的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。
其中, 可选的, UE上行 SPS传输所参考的第一参考上下行比例配置可 以为预配置的上下行比例配置, 此时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以在协 议中固定配置或者预配置, 可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
在方案四种, 确定模块 11用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上下行比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 从至少两个上下 行比例配置中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的 上下行比例配置, 并由选择的上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相 同的子帧形成固定子帧集合。
确定模块 11可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取 TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合, 这个上下行比例配置集合包括两个或多个上下 行比例配置。 比如可以是上表 1中的比例配置 {0, 1 } , 或者是 { 1 , 2, 3 } , 或者 {2, 3}等等。 即可以是上表 1的上下行比例配置中的任意两个或多个 的组合, 或者也可以包含上表 1中没有的上下行比例配置。 可选的, TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时, 可能不 需要通过 eNB通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息通知 UE所述 TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合。
确定模块 11可以根据选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子 帧数最少的上下行比例配置的指示信息, 从获取的至少两个上下行比例配 置中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比 例配置, 确定与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成固定子帧集合。 针对 下行 SPS传输, 从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择下行子帧数最少的上下 行比例配置, 以该上下行比例配置下获取的下行子帧形成固定下行子帧集 合。 针对上行 SPS传输, 从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上行子帧数最 少的上下行比例配置, 以该上下行比例配置下获取的上行子帧形成固定上 行子帧集合。
第一执行模块 12用于在确定模块 11确定的固定子帧集合中的上下行 属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。
具体地, 第一执行模块 12在固定上行子帧集合中的子帧上进行上行 SPS传输,或者在固定下行子帧集合中的子帧上进行下行 SPS传输。以 TDD 上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 {0, 1 }为例, 假设是通过上述方案一确 定固定子帧集合。 假设配置的是下行 SPS, SPS周期为 20ms (—个子帧长 度为 lms ), 激活 SPS传输的时刻是 0, 则 UE执行下行 SPS传输的时刻为 0, 20, 40....。 即 UE在 0, 20, 40....分别在对应的下行子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6} 上执行 SPS传输。 其中,请参阅图 12, 图 12是本申请用户设备第二种实施方式的结构示 意图, 本实施方式的用户设备 200包括确定模块 21 , 第一执行模块 22、 获 取模块 23以及第二执行模块 23 , 其中:
确定模块 21用于确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合 中的每个子帧的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化 时保持不变;
第一执行模块 22用于在确定模块确定的所述固定子帧集合中的上下行 属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。
其中, 确定模块 21与第一执行模块 22功能的具体实现过程跟本申请 用户设备第一种实施方式的相应模块的实现过程一样, 具体请参阅图 11所 示实施方式的详细描述, 在此不再赘述。
本实施方式的用户设备进一步包括获取模块 23 ,获取模块 23用于从确 定模块 21确定的固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块 指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。
本实施方式的用户设备, 还可以通过获取模块 23从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制 指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以 及 SPS 释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。 所述 SPS控制指令可以指示 UE 进行 SPS传输所使用的物理资源、 调制编码方式、 SPS传输时刻等信息中 的一个或多个的组合。
其中, 用于获取 SPS控制指令的子帧为固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS 传输的下行子帧。 具体的, 所述从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输 方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS 控制指令指 UE 在所述子帧上接收以 SPS C-RNTI加掩的 PDCCH控制指令。
针对 SPS控制指令用于指示 SPS激活时,即 SPS控制指令为 SPS激活 指令。获取模块 23从 SPS激活指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS激活 指令进而激活用于 SPS传输的子帧。其中上行 SPS和下行 SPS的 SPS激活 指令都只能从下行子帧中获取。
每个子帧的 SPS激活指令只能在可以调度该子帧的下行子帧上传输。 通常, 下行调度命令传输和下行数据传输在同一个子帧, 即下行 SPS激活 指令可以激活传输所述 SPS激活指令的子帧中的下行 SPS传输, 后续 SPS 传输可以周期性的发生。 以上行为例, SPS激活指令只能在可以调度对应 上行子帧的下行子帧上传输,通常上行调度命令传输在上行数据传输之前 K 个子帧, 其中 K值根据不同的 TDD上下行比例配置而不同, 比如 K可以 为 4, 6等。
事实上, 对于 UE来说, 获取模块 23只在 SPS激活指令能够传输的时 刻监听 SPS激活指令, 或者 UE在其它时刻不监听 SPS激活指令, 或者 UE 在其它时刻监听到 SPS激活指令后, 忽略 SPS激活指令。 具体的, 以 TDD 上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下行比例配置 {0, 1 }为例, 假设 通过上述方案一确定固定子帧集合, 则下行 SPS传输的时刻可以是 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}子帧, 下行 SPS激活指令也只能是一个 LTE无线帧中的 {0, 1 , 5 , 6} 子帧传输, 或者在其它子帧不传输。
上述的 SPS激活指令, 对于已经激活的子帧, 如果再次接收到 SPS激 活指令, 这个 SPS激活指令也可以认为是 SPS修改指令。
当在某个子帧上的数据传输已经完成, 可以通过接收 SPS调度指令释 放通过所述 SPS激活指令分配的资源, 以用于后面数据的调度, 避免资源 浪费。 这时候, 获取模块 23获取的 SPS调度指令用于指示 SPS释放时, 可 以被称为 SPS释放指令。
可选的, SPS释放指令可以在能够调度对应子帧的下行子帧上传输。 以上行为例, SPS 释放指令只能在可以调度对应上行子帧的下行子帧 上传输。 比如针对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }上行 SPS的上行子帧 2的 SPS释放 命令, 如果 K取 6, 那么子帧 2的 SPS释放指令只能在上一个帧的下行子 帧 6上传输(子帧 2之前的第 6个下行子帧为上一个帧的下行子帧 6 )。 针 对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }的下行子帧 1的 SPS释放命令在下行子帧 1上传输, 下行子帧 5的 SPS释放指令在下行子帧 5上传输。 依此类推。
进一步可选的, SPS释放指令也可以在能够调度实际使用的 SPS传输 时刻上传输。 具体的, 以上下行比例配置集合是 {0, 1 }为例, 假设通过上 述方式一确定固定子帧集合, 如配置的是下行 SPS的参数信息, SPS周期 为 20ms (—个子帧长度为 1ms ), 则假设激活 SPS传输的时刻是 0, 则 UE 执行下行 SPS传输的时刻为 0, 20, 40.... , 则 SPS释放命令可以在 20, 40 等能够调度实际使用的 SPS传输时刻上传输。
可选的, 由于确定固定子帧集合后,可以确定 UE具体可以在哪些子帧 上进行 SPS传输, 所以 SPS激活指令可以不限制在固定下行子帧, 而是可 以在任意下行子帧, 包括固定子帧和灵活子帧进行传输, 因此 SPS激活指 令可以指示最近下一次可用的子帧上进行 SPS传输。 这样, 在所指示的最 近下一次可用的子帧进行 SPS传输之前, eNB可以多次发送 SPS激活指令, 以提升 SPS激活指令的可靠性, 此时, 如果 UE已经接收到一个 SPS激活 指令, 当 UE再次接收到相同的 SPS激活指令时, UE可以应用其中的任意 一个 SPS激活指令。 具体的, UE可以忽略或丟弃后面接收到到相同的 SPS 激活指令。 同样的, SPS释放指令也可以做类似处理。
可选的, 所述 SPS传输可以包含上行或下行 SPS新数据传输, 上行或 下行 SPS重传数据传输, 或 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令可以包括上 行或下行 SPS激活指令、 上行或下行 SPS新传输数据块指令、 上行或下行 SPS重传数据块指令,或者上行或下行 SPS 释放指令中的一种或多种组合。 即本发明实施例中确定的 SPS传输时刻可以应用于 SPS数据传输或者 SPS 控制指令传输。
第二执行模块 24用于在确定模块 21确定的固定子帧集合中的上下行 属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对 应的反馈传输。
确定模块 21根据已为其配置的参数信息, 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧 集合。 其中可以通过基站或协议为 UE配置参数信息。 为 UE配置的参数信 息至少包括可能的 TDD上下行比例配置的集合, 下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置,上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, TDD 上下行比例配置改变的周期, 发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变命令的时刻等 参数中的一项或多项。 为 UE配置的参数信息为上行 SPS的参数信息和下 行 SPS的参数信息的其中一种或两种的组合。
确定模块 21确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合的可能实现方案跟上述图 11所示实施方式提供的四种可能的实现方案相同。
比如上行 SPS传输对应的下行反馈传输的固定下行子帧集合可以由参 考的 TDD上下行比例配置下的固定下行子帧组成。下行 SPS传输对应的上 行反馈传输的固定上行子帧集合可以由参考的 TDD上下行比例配置下的固 定上行子帧组成。 这里的参考的 TDD上下行比例配置可以是上述实施方式 所述的第一参考上下行比例配置, 也可以不是。
这里参考的 TDD上下行比例配置可以是下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD 上下行比例配置、上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的至少一 种。 比如当为 UE 配置下行 SPS 传输对应的反馈传输时, 可以使用上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, 当为 UE配置上行 SPS传输对应 的反馈传输时, 可以使用下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。
eNB可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息将上述 TDD上下 行比例配置集合通知 UE。
可选的, UE上行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例 配置可以为 SIB1中通知的 TDD上下行比例配置。 这时, 上行 SPS传输对 应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例配置在协议中预配置或固定配置, 这时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, UE下行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例 配置可以为预配置的 TDD上下行比例配置如 2, 5, 此时, 上行 SPS传输 对应的反馈传输所参考的 TDD上下行比例配置信息可以在协议中固定配置 或者预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
具体地, 第二执行模块 24在固定上行子帧集合中的子帧上进行下行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输, 或者在固定下行子帧集合中的子帧上进行上行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
本实施方式的用户设备, 获取模块 23还用于从固定子帧集合中与 SPS 控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令 包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS 释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。所述 SPS控制指令可以指示 UE进行 SPS 传输所使用的物理资源、 调制编码方式、 SPS传输时刻等信息中的一个或 多个的组合。用于获取 SPS控制指令的子帧为固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS 传输的下行子帧。 具体的, 所述从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输 方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令指 UE在所述子帧上接收以 SPS C-RNTI加掩的 PDCCH控制指令。 具体的实现过程跟本实施方式上述关于 获取模块 23的相关描述相同, 在此不再赘述。
更进一步地, 第一执行模块 22用于获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量, 根据周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
针对于 TDD系统, 为了避免 SPS新数据传输和重传数据在同一个 TTI 出现沖突, 上行 SPS在不同 TDD上下行比例配置下, 周期可能会有一个偏 移量。 具体的不同 TDD上下行比例配置下, 上行 SPS周期的偏移量可能不 同, 详情参见上述表 2所示。
在确定上下行比例配置后, 结合表 2可以获知在该上下行比例配置下 上行子帧的 SPS周期偏移量, 然后通过本申请上述实施方式中的公式 1可 以计算得到上行 SPS传输激活后每次 SPS传输的具体时刻。 具体的计算请 参阅前述实施方式的举例说明。
本实施方式的第一执行模块 22用于获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由第二参考上下行比例配置和上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输的周 期偏移量。
第二参考上下行比例配置可以是为 UE配置的参数信息中的下行
HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配 置、 第一参考上下行比例配置中上行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一 种。具体地, 比如为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息时,可以使用下行 HARQ 定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是通过广 播消息或者 RRC消息或其它消息进行配置。
可选的, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是预配置的 TDD上下行比例配 置, 此时, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此 时, 可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比 例集合中一个 LTE帧中上行子帧数最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。假设 TDD 上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则由上表
1可知 TDD上下行比例配置 1中一个 LTE无线帧中的上行子帧数最少, 第 二参考上下行比例配置为 1。
第二参考上下行比例配置可以是通过广播消息或者专用 RRC消息进行 配置。可选的,第二参考上下行比例配置可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, 本实施方式中, 获取模块 23获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量 还可以具体通过获取偏移量的具体信息来获得, 比如通过广播消息或者专 用 RRC消息配置具体哪个或哪些子帧使用哪个或哪些偏移量的信息。 UE 根据此配置信息执行周期偏移。 可选的, 所述具体信息可以在协议中固定 配置或预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
第一执行模块 22获取第二参考上下行比例配置, 并结合表 2可以获知 该上下行比例配置下上行子帧的 SPS周期偏移量。比如第一执行模块 22获 取的第二参考上下行比例配置为 1 , 针对子帧 2的上行 SPS传输的周期偏 移量由上表 2可知为 1。 或获取的第二参考上下行比例配置为 3, 针对子帧 4的上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量由上表 2可知为 -2。这里的第二参考上下行 比例配置可以跟上述实施方式提到的第一参考上下行比例配置相同, 也可 以不同。
第一执行模块 22根据偏移量以及上述公式 1 , 可以计算得到进行传输 周期偏移后的上行 SPS传输的具体时刻, 在这个计算得到的具体时刻上进 行新数据传输。
例如假设第二参考上下行比例配置为 1 , 上行 SPS的周期 C为 10ms, 上行 SPS传输激活的时间 Q为子帧 2, 默认从第 0个无线帧开始, 即 S为
0, TDD上下行比例配置为 1下的子帧 2的偏移量 V为 1 , 则根据上述公式
1 , 可以计算出 SPS传输从激活时间开始,每次传输发生的时间为: 2, 13, 22, 33, ...。 而针对每个传输失败而出现的重传数据发送的时间分别为: 12, 23, 32, 43, …。 这样, 避免了重传数据和新传输数据在同一个 TTI 发生沖突。
本申请实施方式通过固定的第二参考上下行比例配置, 能够确定某个 上行子帧的 SPS周期偏移量, 根据这个 SPS周期偏移量对该上行 SPS传输 的传输周期进行偏移。 从而有效避免 SPS新数据传输与重传数据在同一个 TTI中出现沖突。
请参阅图 13, 图 13是本申请用户设备第三种实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式的用户设备 300包括处理器 31、 存储器 32、 输入设备 33、 输出 设备 34以及总线系统 35 , 其中:
处理器 31控制用户设备 300的操作,处理器 31还可以称为 CPU( Central Processing Unit, 中央处理单元)。 处理器 31可能是一种集成电路芯片, 具 有信号的处理能力。处理器 31还可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器( DSP )、 专用集成电路(ASIC )、 现成可编程门阵列 (FPGA )或者其他可编程逻辑 器件、 分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件。 通用处理器可以是微 处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
存储器 32可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器, 并向处理器 31提 供指令和数据。 存储器 32的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器 ( NVRAM )。
用户设备 300的各个组件通过总线系统 35耦合在一起, 其中总线系统 35除包括数据总线之外, 还可以包括电源总线、 控制总线和状态信号总线 等。 但是为了清楚说明起见, 在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统 35。
存储器 32存储了如下的元素, 可执行模块或者数据结构, 或者它们的 子集, 或者它们的扩展集:
操作指令: 包括各种操作指令, 用于实现各种操作。
操作系统: 包括各种系统程序, 用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于 硬件的任务。
在本发明实施例中,处理器 31通过调用存储器 32存储的操作指令(该 操作指令可存储在操作系统中), 执行如下操作:
处理器 31用于确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合中 的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持 不变, 在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧 上执行 SPS传输。
其中, 固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至 少一种, 其中固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生 动态变化时均为上行子帧, 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行 比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧。
处理器 31在固定上行子帧集合上进行上行 SPS传输,或者在固定下行 子帧集合上进行下行 SPS传输。 可选的, 处理器 31通过以下四种可能的实现方案确定 TDD帧中的固 定子帧集合:
方案一: 处理器 31用于获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上 下行比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 确定上下行属性在至少 两个上下行比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成固定子帧集合。
上下行比例配置集合可以包括两个或多个上下行比例配置。 比如可以 是上表 1中的比例配置 {0, 1 } , 或者是 { 1 , 2, 3} , 或者 {2, 3}等等。 处理 器 31根据获取的 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 可以确定固定子帧集合 在一个长期演进 ( LTE, Long Term Evolution )无线帧中具体包含哪些子帧。 例如, 假设为 UE配置的 TDD帧上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD 上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则 UE可以确定在一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}为下行子帧, 即固定下行子帧集合, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上行子帧, 即固 定上行子帧集合。 可选的, 上下行比例配置集合还可以包含未在上表 1中 的上下行比例配置中的上下行比例配置, 在本发明中不做限制。
可选的, TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合可以在协议中固定配置或预配 置,此时,可能不需要通过 eNB通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息 通知 UE所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。
方案二: 处理器 31获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上下行 比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 确定上下行属性在至少两个 上下行比例配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成固定子帧集合。
也就是说, 在方案二中, 处理器 31不需要通过上下行比例配置集合确 定固定子帧集合,而直接采用指定的固定子帧集合中的子帧进行 SPS传输。 这里指定固定子帧集合可以是由 TDD上下行比例配置集合获得的固定子帧 集合或固定子帧集合的一个或多个子集。 为 UE配置下行 SPS时, 这个固 定子帧集合可以是配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合得到的固定下行子帧集 合或固定下行子帧集合的一个或多个子集, 上行 SPS类似。 UE可以通过广 播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取所述指示信息。
方案三: 处理器 31获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由第一参考 上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 由第一参考上下行 比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。 固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种 , 其中固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化 时均为上行子帧, 固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置 发生动态变化时均为下行子帧。
处理器 31获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 第一参考上下行比例 配置可以是一个或多个。 可选的, 上行 SPS参考的第一参考上行比例配置 不同于下行 SPS参考的第一参考上下行比例配置。 当上行 SPS与下行 SPS 分别采用不同的第一参考上下行比例配置时, 针对上行 SPS, 由上行 SPS 参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合,针对下行 SPS, 由下行 SPS参考的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。
当上行 SPS与下行 SPS采用同一个第一参考上下行比例配置时, 由第 一参考上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由第一 参考上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
可选的, 形成固定下行子帧集合所使用的第一参考上下行比例配置为
SIB1指示的比例配置。具体的,所述第一参考上下行比例配置是 SIB1中的 TDD上下行比例配置。
第一参考上下行比例配置可以包括下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行 比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的至少一种。 比如当为 UE配置下行 SPS参数时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以是上行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置, 当为 UE配置上行 SPS参数时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以是下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配 置。 具体地, 处理器 31获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 如果针对上 行 SPS , 由下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定 上行子帧集合, 如果针对下行 SPS, 由上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例 配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。
其中, 可选的 UE上行 SPS传输所参考的第一参考上下行比例配置可 以为预配置的上下行比例配置, 此时, 第一参考上下行比例配置可以在协 议中固定配置或者预配置, 可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
方案四: 处理器 31获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中上下行 比例配置集合包括至少两个上下行比例配置, 从至少两个上下行比例配置 中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例 配置, 并由选择的上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形 成固定子帧集合。
处理器 31可以通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息获取 TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合, 这个上下行比例配置集合包括两个或多个上下 行比例配置。 比如可以是上表 1中的比例配置 {0, 1 } , 或者是 { 1 , 2, 3 } , 或者 {2, 3 }等等。 即可以是上表 1的上下行比例配置中的任意两个或多个 的组合, 或者也可以包含上表 1中没有的上下行比例配置。 可选的, TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时, 可能不 需要通过 eNB通过广播消息或专用 RRC消息或其它消息通知 UE所述 TDD 帧的上下行比例配置集合。
处理器 31可以根据选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧 数最少的上下行比例配置的指示信息, 从获取的至少两个上下行比例配置 中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例 配置, 确定于 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成固定子帧集合。 针对下 行 SPS传输, 从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择下行子帧数最少的上下行 比例配置, 以该上下行比例配置下获取的下行子帧形成固定下行子帧集合。 针对上行 SPS传输, 从至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上行子帧数最少的 上下行比例配置, 以该上下行比例配置下获取的上行子帧形成固定上行子 帧集合。
存储器 32进一步存储处理器 31确定的 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合。 可选的,处理器 31还可以用于从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传 输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活 指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS释放指令中 的一个或多个的组合。 所述 SPS控制指令可以指示 UE进行 SPS传输所使 用的物理资源、 调制编码方式、 SPS传输时刻等信息中的一个或多个的组 合。
其中,处理器 31从固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧上获 取 SPS控制指令。 具体的, 所述从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输 方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令指 UE在所述子帧上接收以 SPS C-RNTI加掩的 PDCCH控制指令。
针对 SPS控制指令用于指示 SPS激活时,即 SPS控制指令为 SPS激活 指令。处理器 31从 SPS激活指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS激活指 令进而激活用于 SPS传输的子帧。其中上行 SPS和下行 SPS的 SPS激活指 令都只能从下行子帧中获取。
每个子帧的 SPS激活指令只能在可以调度该子帧的下行子帧上传输。 通常, 下行调度命令传输和下行数据传输在同一个子帧, 即下行 SPS激活 指令可以激活传输所述 SPS激活指令的子帧中的下行 SPS传输, 后续 SPS 传输可以周期性的发生。 以上行为例, SPS激活指令只能在可以调度对应 上行子帧的下行子帧上传输,通常上行调度命令传输在上行数据传输之前 K 个子帧, 其中 K值根据不同的 TDD上下行比例配置而不同, 比如 K可以 为 4, 6等。
事实上, 对于 UE来说, 处理器 31只在 SPS激活指令能够传输的时刻 监听 SPS激活指令, 或者 UE在其它时刻不监听 SPS激活指令, 或者 UE 在其它时刻监听到 SPS激活指令后, 忽略 SPS激活指令。
上述的 SPS激活指令, 对于已经激活的子帧, 如果再次接收到 SPS激 活指令, 这个 SPS激活指令也可以认为是 SPS修改指令。
当在某个子帧上的数据传输已经完成, 可以通过接收 SPS调度指令释 放通过所述 SPS激活指令分配的资源, 以用于后面数据的调度, 避免资源 浪费。 这时候, 获取模块 23获取的 SPS调度指令用于指示 SPS释放时, 可 以被称为 SPS释放指令。
可选的, SPS释放指令可以在能够调度对应子帧的下行子帧上传输。 以上行为例, SPS 释放指令只能在可以调度对应上行子帧的下行子帧 上传输。 比如针对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }上行 SPS的上行子帧 2的 SPS释放 命令, 如果 K取 6, 那么子帧 2的 SPS释放指令只能在上一个帧的下行子 帧 6上传输。 针对上下行比例为 {0, 1 }的下行子帧 1的 SPS释放命令在下 行子帧 1上传输, 下行子帧 5的 SPS释放命令在下行子帧 5上传输。 依此 类推。
进一步可选的, SPS释放指令也可以在能够调度实际使用的 SPS传输 时刻上传输。 具体的, 以上下行比例配置集合是 {0, 1 }为例, 假设通过上 述方式一确定固定子帧集合, 如配置的是下行 SPS的参数信息, SPS周期 为 20ms (—个子帧长度为 lms ), 则假设激活 SPS传输的时刻是 0, 则 UE 执行下行 SPS传输的时刻为 0, 20, 40.... , 则 SPS释放命令可以在 20, 40 等能够调度实际使用的 SPS传输时刻上传输。
可选的, 由于确定固定子帧集合后,可以确定 UE具体可以在哪些子帧 上进行 SPS传输, 所以 SPS激活指令可以不限制在固定下行子帧, 而是可 以在任意下行子帧, 包括固定子帧和灵活子帧进行传输, 因此 SPS激活指 令可以指示最近下一次可用的子帧上进行 SPS传输。 这样, 在所指示的最 近下一次可用的子帧进行 SPS传输之前, eNB可以多次发送 SPS激活指令, 以提升 SPS激活指令的可靠性, 此时, 如果 UE已经接收到一个 SPS激活 指令, 当 UE再次接收到相同的 SPS激活指令时, UE可以应用其中的任意 一个 SPS激活指令。 具体的, UE可以忽略或丟弃后面接收到到相同的 SPS 激活指令。 同样的, SPS释放指令也可以做类似处理。
可选的, 所述 SPS传输可以包含上行或下行 SPS新数据传输, 上行或 下行 SPS重传数据传输, 或 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令可以包括上 行或下行 SPS激活指令、 上行或下行 SPS新传输数据块指令、 上行或下行 SPS重传数据块指令,或者上行或下行 SPS 释放指令中的一种或多种组合。 即本发明实施例中确定的 SPS传输时刻可以应用于 SPS数据传输或者 SPS 控制指令传输。
可选的, 处理器 31还可以用于在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS 传输对应的反馈传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传 输。
处理器 31在固定上行子帧集合中的子帧上进行下行 SPS传输对应的反 馈传输, 或者在固定下行子帧集合中的子帧上进行上行 SPS传输对应的反 馈传输。
处理器 31还用于从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的 子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新 传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS 释放指令中的一个或多个 的组合。所述 SPS控制指令可以指示 UE进行 SPS传输所使用的物理资源、 调制编码方式、 SPS传输时刻等信息中的一个或多个的组合。用于获取 SPS 控制指令的子帧为固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。具体的, 所述从固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS 控制指令指 UE在所述子帧上接收以 SPS C-RNTI加掩的 PDCCH控制指令。 具体的实现过程跟本实施方式上述获取 SPS控制指令相同,在此不再赘述。
可选的, 处理器 31还可以获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量, 根据周期 偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
处理器 31获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由第二参考上下行比例配 置和上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量。
第二参考上下行比例配置可以是为 UE配置的参数信息中的下行
HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配 置、 第一参考上下行比例配置中上行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一 种。具体地, 比如为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息时,可以使用下行 HARQ 定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是通过广 播消息或者 RRC消息或其它消息进行配置。
可选的, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是预配置的 TDD上下行比例配 置, 此时, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此 时, 可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, 第二参考上下行比例配置可以是为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比 例集合中一个 LTE帧中上行子帧数最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。假设 TDD 上下行比例配置集合是上表 1中的 TDD上下行比例配置 {0, 1 } , 则由上表
1可知 TDD上下行比例配置 1中一个 LTE无线帧中的上行子帧数最少, 第 二参考上下行比例配置为 1。
第二参考上下行比例配置可以是通过广播消息或者专用 RRC消息进行 配置。可选的,第二参考上下行比例配置可以在协议中固定配置或预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。
可选的, 本实施方式中, 处理器 31获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量还 可以具体通过获取偏移量的具体信息来获得, 比如通过广播消息或者专用 RRC消息配置具体哪个或哪些子帧使用哪个或哪些偏移量的信息。 UE根据 此配置信息执行周期偏移。 可选的, 所述具体信息可以在协议中固定配置 或预配置, 此时可能不需要 eNB通知 UE。 处理器 31获取第二参考上下行比例配置, 并结合表 2可以获知该上下 行比例配置下上行子帧的 SPS周期偏移量。比如处理器 31获取的第二参考 上下行比例配置为 1 , 针对子帧 2的上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量由上表 2 可知为 1。 或获取的第二参考上下行比例配置为 3 , 针对子帧 4的上行 SPS 传输的周期偏移量由上表 2可知为 -2。这里的第二参考上下行比例配置可以 跟上述实施方式提到的第一参考上下行比例配置相同, 也可以不同。
处理器 31根据偏移量以及上述公式 1 , 可以计算得到进行传输周期偏 移后的上行 SPS传输的具体时刻, 在这个计算得到的具体时刻上进行新数 据传输。
例如假设第二参考上下行比例配置为 1 , 上行 SPS的周期 C为 10ms , 上行 SPS传输激活的时间 Q为子帧 3 , 默认从第 0个无线帧开始, 即 S为
0, TDD上下行比例配置为 1下的子帧 3的偏移量 V为- 1 ,则根据上述公式
1 , 可以计算出 SPS传输从激活时间开始,每次传输发生的时间为: 3 , 12, 23 , 32, ...。 而针对每个传输失败而出现的重传数据发送的时间分别为: 13 , 22, 33 , 42 ···。 这样, 避免了重传数据和新传输数据在同一个 ΤΉ发 生沖突。
这样, 通过固定的第二参考上下行比例配置, 能够确定某个上行子帧 的 SPS周期偏移量, 根据这个 SPS周期偏移量对该上行 SPS传输的传输周 期进行偏移。 从而有效避免 SPS新数据传输与重传数据在同一个 ΤΉ中出 现沖突。
上述本申请实施方式揭示的方法可以应用于处理器 31中, 或者由处理 器 31实现。 在实现过程中, 上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器 31中的硬 件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。 可以实现或者执行本发明实 施例中的公开的各方法、 步骤及逻辑框图。 结合本申请实施方式所公开的 方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成, 或者用译码处理器 中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本 领域成熟的存储介质中。 该存储介质位于存储器 32, 处理器 31读取存储器 32中的信息, 结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本申请实施方式提供的用户设备, 通过确定固定子帧集合, 其中固定 子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态 变化时保持不变, 在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向 相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。 通过这种方式, 能够实现 TDD动态上下行比 例配置时 SPS的正常执行, 提示 SPS性能, 减少 UE执行 SPS的复杂度。
本申请还提供一种基站的实施方式,请参阅图 14, 图 14是本申请基站 一个实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式的基站 400包括配置模块 41和通 知模块 42, 其中:
配置模块 41用于为 UE配置能够确定固定子帧集合的参数信息, 其中 固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生 动态变化时保持不变。
配置模块 41为 UE配置的参数信息包括指示信息, 还至少包括可能的 TDD上下行比例配置的集合、 下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配 置、 TDD上下行比例配置改变的周期、发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变命令 的时刻等参数中的一项或多项。其中,指示信息用于指示 UE采用何种方式 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合。 本实施方式提供基站通知 UE的指示信息 以下几种可能的情况:
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用配置 TDD上下行比例配置集合确 定固定子帧集合。 UE则通过获取 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 由 TDD帧的 上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为上行子帧的子帧形成固定上行子帧集 合, 由 TDD帧上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧的子帧形成固 定下行子帧集合。
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用配置的指示信息直接指定的固定 子帧集合。 基站根据为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 确定固定子 帧集合或固定子帧集合的一个或多个子集。 直接通过指示信息指定固定子 帧集合中的子帧。 比如假设为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合是 {0, 1 } , 则在一个 LTE无线帧中子帧 {0, 1 , 5, 6}为下行子帧或特殊子帧, 即 固定下行子帧子集, {2, 3, 7, 8}为上行子帧, 即固定上行子帧子集。 此 时, 如果为 UE配置的是下行 SPS配置参数, 则基站可以通过指示信息直 接指定固定子帧集合可以为 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}中的一个或多个子帧组成的集合, 如 {0, 1 }或 { 1 , 5, 6}等, 如果为 UE配置的是上行 SPS配置参数, 则基站 可以通过指示信息直接指定固定子帧集合可以为 {2, 3, 7, 8}中的一个或 多个子帧组成的集合, 如 {2, 3}或 {7, 8}。
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置确定 固定子帧集合, 这时基站通知 UE指示信息的同时, 还为 UE配置至少一个 参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。 UE通过这个参考的 TDD上下行比例配置来 确定固定子帧集合。上行 SPS与下行 SPS可以分别采用不同的参考的 TDD 上下行比例配置,也可以使用同一个参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。上行 SPS 可以使用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 下行 SPS可以使用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的下行子帧形成固定下行 子帧集合。
其中参考的 TDD上下行比例配置可以包括下行 HARQ定时参考的上下 行比例配置以及上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的至少一种。 当 为 UE配置上行 SPS的参数信息时使用下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例 配置, 当为 UE配置下行 SPS的参数信息时使用上行 HARQ定时参考的上 下行比例配置。
比如基站通知 UE是采用配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合中上下行属 性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置确定固定子 帧集合。 这时, 基站可以为 UE配置一个 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 以使 UE根据这个 TDD上下行比例配置集合找到上下行属性与 SPS传输方向相 同的子帧最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。
通知模块 42将为 UE配置的参数信息通知 UE, 通知模块 42可以通过 系统广播消息中通知 UE,也可以通过专用 RRC消息如 RRC重配置消息或 其它消息通知 UE, 或者这两者的结合。 即一部分参数信息通过系统广播消 息中通知 UE, 另一部分参数信息通过专用 RRC消息如 RRC重配置消息或 其它消息通知 UE。 当有部分或全部参数信息通过专用 RRC消息通知 UE 时, UE可以向基站发送 RRC完成消息。
请参阅图 15 ,图 15是本申请提供的基站第二种实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式的基站 500包括处理器 51、 存储器 52、 输入设备 53、 输出设备 54以及总线系统 55, 其中:
处理器 51控制基站 500的操作, 处理器 51还可以称为 CPU ( Central Processing Unit, 中央处理单元)。 处理器 51可能是一种集成电路芯片, 具 有信号的处理能力。处理器 51还可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器( DSP )、 专用集成电路(ASIC )、 现成可编程门阵列 (FPGA )或者其他可编程逻辑 器件、 分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件。 通用处理器可以是微 处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
存储器 52可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器, 并向处理器 51提 供指令和数据。 存储器 52的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器 ( NVRAM )。
基站 500的各个组件通过总线系统 55耦合在一起, 其中总线系统 55 除包括数据总线之外,还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。 但是为了清楚说明起见, 在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统 55。
存储器 52存储了如下的元素, 可执行模块或者数据结构, 或者它们的 子集, 或者它们的扩展集:
操作指令: 包括各种操作指令, 用于实现各种操作。
操作系统: 包括各种系统程序, 用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于 硬件的任务。
在本发明实施例中,处理器 51通过调用存储器 52存储的操作指令(该 操作指令可存储在操作系统中), 执行如下操作:
处理器 51为 UE配置能够确定固定子帧集合的参数信息并将参数信息 通知 UE, 其中固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下 行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变。
处理器 51为 UE配置的参数信息包括指示信息, 还至少包括可能的 TDD上下行比例配置的集合、 下行 HARQ定时参考的 TDD上下行比例配 置、 TDD上下行比例配置改变的周期、发送 TDD上下行比例配置改变命令 的时刻等参数中的一项或多项。其中,指示信息用于指示 UE采用何种方式 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合。 本实施方式提供基站通知 UE的指示信息 以下几种可能的情况:
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用配置 TDD上下行比例配置集合确 定固定子帧集合。 UE则通过获取 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 由 TDD帧的 上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 由 TDD帧上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧的子帧形成固定下行 子帧集合。
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用配置的指示信息直接指定的固定 子帧集合。 基站根据为 UE配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 确定固定子 帧集合或固定子帧集合的一个或多个子集。 直接通过指示信息指定固定子 帧集合中的子帧。
比如基站通知 UE的指示信息为采用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置确定 固定子帧集合, 这时基站通知 UE指示信息的同时, 还为 UE配置至少一个 参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。 UE通过这个参考的 TDD上下行比例配置来 确定固定子帧集合。上行 SPS与下行 SPS可以分别采用不同的参考的 TDD 上下行比例配置,也可以使用同一个参考的 TDD上下行比例配置。上行 SPS 可以使用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成固定上行子帧集合, 下行 SPS可以使用参考的 TDD上下行比例配置中的下行子帧形成固定下行 子帧集合。
比如基站通知 UE是采用配置的 TDD上下行比例配置集合中上下行属 性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置确定固定子 帧集合。 这时, 基站可以为 UE配置一个 TDD上下行比例配置集合, 以使 UE根据这个 TDD上下行比例配置集合找到上下行属性与 SPS传输方向相 同的子帧最少的 TDD上下行比例配置。
处理器 51可以通过系统广播消息中通知 UE, 也可以通过专用 RRC消 息如 RRC重配置消息或其它消息通知 UE, 或者这两者的结合。 即一部分 参数信息通过系统广播消息中通知 UE, 另一部分参数信息通过专用 RRC 消息如 RRC重配置消息或其它消息通知 UE。 当有部分或全部参数信息通 过专用 RRC消息通知 UE时, UE可以向基站发送 RRC完成消息。
上述本申请实施方式揭示的方法可以应用于处理器 51中, 或者由处理 器 51实现。 在实现过程中, 上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器 51中的硬 件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。 可以实现或者执行本发明实 施例中的公开的各方法、 步骤及逻辑框图。 结合本申请实施方式所公开的 方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成, 或者用译码处理器 中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本 领域成熟的存储介质中。 该存储介质位于存储器 52, 处理器 51读取存储器 52中的信息, 结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
请参阅图 16, 图 16是本申请用户设备第四种实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式的用户设备 600包括判断模块 61和传输控制模块 62, 其中: 判断模块 61用于在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断 执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化;
在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断模块 61判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否也发生变化。 比如 TDD的上下 行比例配置在 {0, 1 }之间动态变化, 当从 0变为 1 时, 子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 6} 的都为下行子帧, 子帧 {2, 3 , 7, 8}都为上行子帧, 而子帧 4由 TDD上下 行比例配置为 0时的上行子帧变为上下行比例配置为 1时的下行子帧, 子 帧 9由 TDD上下行比例配置 0时的上行子帧变为上下行比例配置为 1时的 下行子帧。 因此, 在从 TDD上下行比例由 0变为 1时, 子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 6} 和子帧 {2, 3 , 7 , 8}的上下行属性没有发生变化, 子帧 {4, 9}的上下行属 性发生了变化。 将判断结果输出给传输控制模块 42。
传输控制模块 62在判断模块 61判断到上下行属性发生变化时, 忽略 SPS传输。
传输控制模块 61在判断模块 61判断到执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧 的上下行属性发生变化时, 忽略该上下行属性发生变化的子帧上的 SPS传 输。
作为一种优选的实现方式, 本实施方式用户设备的判断模块 61还可以 进一步用于判断忽略的 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输。 将判断结果输出 给传输控制模块 62。
传输控制模块 62进一步用于在判断模块 61判断到 SPS传输是 SPS新 数据传输时, 响应后续的调度指令重新执行忽略的 SPS新数据传输。
作为另一种优选的实现方式, 本实施方式用户设备的传输控制模块 62 还可以进一步用于将 SPS传输延迟至上下行属性发生变化的 SPS可用子帧 后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将 SPS传输提前至上下行属性发生变化 的 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧,其中 W和 M分别为自然数。 其中, W、 M可以通过 RRC消息配置, 或者提前预配置, 如 W=l , 贝' J 指 UE将忽略的 SPS传输时刻延迟到下一个可用的时刻。 例如, 某个上行 SPS传输时刻变成下行后, UE将 SPS传输时刻延迟到下一个上行时刻。 如 M=l , 则指 UE将忽略的 SPS传输时刻提前到下一个可用的时刻。
例如假设 UE的 TDD上下行比例配置集合为 {0, 1 } , 在配比 0下, UE 的某个上行 SPS传输为子帧 4, 则当配比改成 1后, 子帧 4的传输方向变 为下行, UE可以忽略该上行 SPS的传输, 然后 UE可以将该忽略的 SPS传 输延迟到下一个上行子帧 7 (当 W=l时 ), 或者将该忽略的 SPS传输提前 到上一个上行子帧 3 ( M=l )。 下行类似, 不再赘述。
本实施方式提供的用户设备, 通过 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态 变化时, 判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化, 在上下行属性发生变化时忽略上下行属性发生变化的子帧上的 SPS传输。 通过这样的方式,提供一种因 TDD上下行比例配置发生变化,用于执行 SPS 传输的某些可用子帧的上下行属性也发生变化时对 SPS数据传输的一种处 理方式。
另外, 本实施方式提供的用户设备, 还可以进一步对忽略的 SPS传输 的进行处理, 即当忽略的 SPS传输是 SPS新数据传输时, 进一步响应后续 的调度指令重新传输该忽略的 SPS传输, 从而能够确保忽略的 SPS新数据 传输中的数据丟失。
更进一步地, 本实施方式提供的用户设备, 还可以通过将忽略的 SPS 传输延迟到后面某个可用子帧或提前到前面某个可用子帧上进行传输。 这 样, 能有效避免因为子帧上下行属性发生变化而导致数据丟失, 提升 SPS 传输性能和可靠性。
请参阅图 17, 图 17是本申请用户设备第五种实施方式的结构示意图, 本实施方式用户设备 700包括处理器 71、 存储器 72、 输入设备 73、 输出设 备 74以及总线系统 75, 其中:
处理器 71控制用户设备 700的操作,处理器 71还可以称为 CPU( Central Processing Unit, 中央处理单元)。 处理器 71可能是一种集成电路芯片, 具 有信号的处理能力。处理器 71还可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器( DSP )、 专用集成电路(ASIC )、 现成可编程门阵列 (FPGA )或者其他可编程逻辑 器件、 分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件。 通用处理器可以是微 处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
存储器 72可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器, 并向处理器 71提 供指令和数据。 存储器 72的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器 ( NVRAM )。
用户设备 700的各个组件通过总线系统 75耦合在一起, 其中总线系统 75除包括数据总线之外, 还可以包括电源总线、 控制总线和状态信号总线 等。 但是为了清楚说明起见, 在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统 75。
存储器 72存储了如下的元素, 可执行模块或者数据结构, 或者它们的 子集, 或者它们的扩展集:
操作指令: 包括各种操作指令, 用于实现各种操作。
操作系统: 包括各种系统程序, 用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于 硬件的任务。
在本发明实施例中,处理器 71通过调用存储器 72存储的操作指令(该 操作指令可存储在操作系统中), 执行如下操作:
处理器 71用于在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断执 行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化, 在上下行属性发 生变化时, 忽略 SPS传输。
在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时,处理器 71判断执行 SPS 传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否也发生变化。比如 TDD的上下行比 例配置在 {0, 1 }之间动态变化, 当从 0变为 1时, 子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}的都 为下行子帧, 子帧 {2, 3 , 7, 8}都为上行子帧, 而子帧 4由 TDD上下行比 例配置为 0时的上行子帧变为下行子帧, 子帧 9由 TDD上下行比例配置 0 时的上行子帧变为下行子帧。 因此, 在从 TDD上下行比例由 0变为 1时, 子帧 {0, 1 , 5 , 6}和子帧 {2, 3 , 7, 8}的上下行属性没有发生变化, 子帧 {4, 9}的上下行属性发生了变化。
处理器 71在判断到执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性发生变 化时, 忽略该上下行属性发生变化的子帧上的 SPS传输。
作为一种优选的实现方式, 本实施方式处理器 71还可以进一步判断忽 略的 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输,在忽略的 SPS传输为 SPS新数据传 输时, 响应后续的调度指令重新执行忽略的 SPS新数据传输。
作为另一种优选的实现方式, 本实施方式处理器 71还可以进一步用于 将 SPS传输延迟至上下行属性发生变化的 SPS可用子帧后面的第 W个 SPS 可用子帧, 或者将 SPS传输提前至上下行属性发生变化的 SPS可用子帧前 面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧, 其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
其中, W、 M可以通过 RRC消息配置, 或者提前预配置, 如 W=l , 则 指 UE将忽略的 SPS传输时刻延迟到下一个可用的时刻。 例如, 某个上行 SPS传输时刻变成下行后, UE将 SPS传输时刻延迟到下一个上行时刻。 如 M=l , 则指 UE将忽略的 SPS传输时刻提前到下一个可用的时刻。
例如假设 UE的 TDD上下行比例配置集合为 {0, 1 } , 在配比 0下, UE 的某个上行 SPS传输为子帧 4, 则当配比改成 1后, 子帧 4的传输方向变 为下行, UE可以忽略该上行 SPS的传输, 然后 UE可以将该忽略的 SPS传 输延迟到下一个上行子帧 7 (当 W=l时 ), 或者将该忽略的 SPS传输提前 到上一个上行子帧 3 ( M=l )。 下行类似, 不再赘述。
上述本申请实施方式揭示的方法可以应用于处理器 71中, 或者由处理 器 71实现。 在实现过程中, 上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器 71中的硬 件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。 可以实现或者执行本发明实 施例中的公开的各方法、 步骤及逻辑框图。 结合本申请实施方式所公开的 方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成, 或者用译码处理器 中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本 领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器 72, 处理器 71读取存储器 72中的信息, 结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本实施方式提供的用户设备, 通过 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态 变化时, 判断执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化, 在上下行属性发生变化时忽略上下行属性发生变化的子帧上的 SPS传输。 通过这样的方式,提供一种因 TDD上下行比例配置发生变化,用于执行 SPS 传输的某些可用子帧的上下行属性也发生变化时对 SPS数据传输的一种处 理方式。
另外, 本实施方式提供的用户设备, 还可以进一步对忽略的 SPS传输 的进行处理, 即当忽略的 SPS传输是 SPS新数据传输时, 进一步响应后续 的调度指令重新传输该忽略的 SPS传输, 从而能够确保忽略的 SPS新数据 传输中的数据丟失。
更进一步地, 本实施方式提供的用户设备, 还可以通过将忽略的 SPS 传输延迟到后面某个可用子帧或提前到前面某个可用子帧上进行传输。 这 样, 能有效避免因为子帧上下行属性发生变化而导致数据丟失, 提升 SPS 传输性能和可靠性。
通过上述实施方式提供的半静态调度方法及用户设备, 通过确定固定 子帧集合, 其中固定子帧集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在 TDD帧的上下 行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变, 在固定子帧集合中的上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。 通过这种方式, 能够实 现 TDD动态上下行比例配置时 SPS的正常执行, 提示 SPS性能, 减少 UE 执行 SPS的复杂度。
在本申请所提供的几个实施方式中, 应该理解到, 所揭露的系统, 装 置和方法, 可以通过其它的方式实现。 例如, 以上所描述的装置实施方式 仅仅是示意性的, 例如, 所述模块或单元的划分, 仅仅为一种逻辑功能划 分, 实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式, 例如多个单元或组件可以结合或 者可以集成到另一个系统, 或一些特征可以忽略, 或不执行。 另一点, 所 显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口, 装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接, 可以是电性, 机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的, 作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元, 即可以位于一个地 方, 或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。 可以根据实际的需要选择其中的 部分或者全部单元来实现本实施方式方案的目的。
另外, 在本申请各个实施方式中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单 元中, 也可以是各个单元单独物理存在, 也可以两个或两个以上单元集成 在一个单元中。 上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现, 也可以采用 软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销 售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解, 本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方 案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来, 该计算机软件产品存储 在一个存储介质中, 包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人 计算机, 服务器, 或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor )执行本申请各个 实施方式所述方法的全部或部分步骤。 而前述的存储介质包括: U盘、 移 动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM, Read-Only Memory )、随机存取存储器(RAM, Random Access Memory )、 磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述仅为本申请的实施方式, 并非因此限制本申请的专利范围, 凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换, 或直 接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域, 均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范 围内。

Claims

权利要求
1. 一种半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述半静态调度方法包括: 确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中所述固定子帧集合中的每个子帧 的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时保持不变; 在所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同 的子帧上执行 SPS传输。
2.根据权利要求 1所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于,所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括:
获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包 括至少两个上下行比例配置;
确定所述上下行属性在所述至少两个上下行比例配置下保持不变的子 帧, 以形成所述固定子帧集合。
3.根据权利要求 1所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于,所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括:
获取指示信息, 其中所述指示信息直接指定所述固定子帧集合中的所 述子帧。
4.根据权利要求 1所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于,所述确定 TDD 帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括:
获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置;
由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子 帧集合。
5.根据权利要求 1-4任意一项所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所 述固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种, 其中所述固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生 动态变化时均为上行子帧, 所述固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧 的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧;
所述在所述固定子帧集合上进行 SPS传输的步骤进一步包括: 在所述固定上行子帧集合上进行上行 SPS传输, 或者在所述固定下行 子帧集合上进行下行 SPS传输。
6.根据权利要求 5所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述由所述第 一参考上下行比例配置中的特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合的步骤 进一步包括:
由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧 集合, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述 固定下行子帧集合。
7.根据权利要求 6所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 形成所述固定 上行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置不同于形成所述固定 下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置。
8.根据权利要求 6或 7所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述形成 所述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置为第一系统 信息块指示的比例配置。
9.根据权利要求 6-8任意一项所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所 述第一参考上下行比例配置包括下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置以 及上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的至少一种, 其中由所述下行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集 合, 由所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子 帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
10. 根据权利要求 1 所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合的步骤包括:
获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包 括至少两个上下行比例配置;
从所述至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输 方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 并由选择的所述上下行比例配 置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合。
11.根据权利要求 5-10任意一项所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 通过系统广播消息、 专用 RRC消息中的至少一种获取所述 TDD帧的上下 行比例配置集合。
12.根据权利要求 1-11任意一项所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于, 所述半静态调度方法进一步包括: 在所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈传输 的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
13.根据权利要求 1-12任意一项所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于, 所述半静态调度方法进一步包括:
从所述固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中所述 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数 据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。
14.根据权利要求 13所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 用于获取所 述 SPS控制指令的所述子帧为所述固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下 行子帧。
15.根据权利要求 1-14任意一项所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于, 所述在所述固定子帧集合中的子帧执行 SPS传输的步骤包括:
获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量;
根据所述周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
16.根据权利要求 15所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述获取上 行 SPS传输的周期偏移量的步骤具体包括:
获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第二参考上下行比例配置和 所述上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量。
17.根据权利要求 16所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二参 考上下行比例配置为所述下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述上 行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述第一参考上下行比例配置中上 行子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一种。
18.根据权利要求 15所述的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二参 考上下行比例配置为 UE获取的 TDD上下行比例配置集合中上行子帧最少 的 TDD上下行比例配置。
19.根据权利要求 16-18任意一项所述的半静态调度方法,其特征在于, 所述第二参考上下行比例配置在协议中固定配置或预配置。
20.一种半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述半静态调度方法包括: 在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断执行 SPS传输的
SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化; 若所述上下行属性发生变化, 则忽略所述 SPS传输。
21. 根据权利要求 20所述的的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述半 静态调度方法进一步包括:
判断所述 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输;
若所述 SPS传输为 SPS新数据传输, 则响应后续的调度指令重新执行 忽略的所述 SPS新数据传输。
22. 根据权利要求 20所述的的半静态调度方法, 其特征在于, 所述半 静态调度方法进一步包括:
将所述 SPS传输延迟至所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧 后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将所述 SPS传输提前至所述上下行属性 发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧, 其中 W和 M 分别为自然数。
23.—种用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备包括确定模块和第一执 行模块, 其中:
所述确定模块用于确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中所述固定子帧 集合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态 变化时保持不变;
所述第一执行模块用于在所述确定模块确定的所述固定子帧集合中的 所述上下行属性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输。
24.根据权利要求 23所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述确定模块用于 获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包括至 少两个上下行比例配置, 确定所述上下行属性在所述至少两个上下行比例 配置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成所述固定子帧集合。
25.根据权利要求 23所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述确定模块用于 获取指示信息, 其中所述指示信息直接指定所述固定子帧集合中的所述子 帧。
26.根据权利要求 23所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述确定模块用于 获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中 的特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合。
27.根据权利要求 23-26任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种, 其 中所述固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动 态变化时均为上行子帧, 所述固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的 上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧; 所述第一执行模块用于在 所述固定上行子帧集合上进行上行 SPS传输, 或者在所述固定下行子帧集 合上进行下行 SPS传输。
28.根据权利要求 27所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述确定模块用于 获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中 的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置 中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
29.根据权利要求 28所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 形成所述固定上行 子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置不同于形成所述固定下行 子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置。
30.根据权利要求 27或 28所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述形成所 述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置为第一系统信 息块指示的比例配置。
31.根据权利要求 28-30任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 第一参考上下行比例配置包括下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置以及 上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置, 其中所述确定模块用于获取至少 一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配 置中的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述上行 HARQ定时参考 的上下行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
32.根据权利要求 23所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述确定模块用于 获取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包括至 少两个上下行比例配置, 从所述至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上下行属 性与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 并由选择 的所述上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成所述固定 子帧集合。
33.根据权利要求 27-32任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 确定模块用于通过系统广播消息、 专用 RRC 消息中的至少一种获取所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合。
34.根据权利要求 23-33任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 用户设备进一步包括第二执行模块, 其中, 所述第二执行模块用于在确定 模块确定的所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输对应的反馈 传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
35.根据权利要求 23-34任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 用户设备进一步包括获取模块, 所述获取模块用于从确定模块确定的所述 固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中所述传输控制指令包括 SPS 激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS 重传数据块指令以及 SPS 释放指令中的一个或多个的组合。
36.根据权利要求 35所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 用于获取所述 SPS 控制指令的所述子帧为所述固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。
37.根据权利要求 23-36任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 第一执行模块用于获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量, 根据所述周期偏移量 对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
38.根据权利要求 37所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一执行模块 用于获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第二参考上下行比例配置和 所述上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量。
39.根据权利要求 38所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第二参考上下 行比例配置为所述下行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述上行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述第一参考上下行比例配置中上行 子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一种。
40.根据权利要求 38所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第二参考上下 行比例配置为 UE获取的 TDD上下行比例配置集合中上行子帧最少的 TDD 上下行比例配置。
41.根据权利要求 38-40任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 第二参考上下行比例配置在协议中固定配置或预配置。
42.—种用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备包括判断模块和传输控 制模块, 其中:
所述判断模块用于在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断 执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化;
所述传输控制模块在所述判断模块判断到所述上下行属性发生变化时 , 忽略所述 SPS传输。
43.根据权利要求 42所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述判断模块进一 步用于判断所述 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输; 所述传输控制模块进一 步用于在所述判断模块判断到所述 SPS传输是 SPS新数据传输时, 响应后 续的调度指令重新执行忽略的所述 SPS新数据传输。
44.根据权利要求 42所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述传输控制模块 进一步用于将所述 SPS传输延迟至所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可 用子帧后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将所述 SPS传输提前至至所述上 下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧,其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
45.—种用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备包括存储器和处理器, 所述处理器与所述存储器电连接, 其中:
所述处理器用于确定 TDD帧中的固定子帧集合, 其中所述固定子帧集 合中的每个子帧的上下行属性在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变 化时保持不变, 在所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输的传 输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输;
46.根据权利要求 45所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器用于获 取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包括至少 两个上下行比例配置, 确定所述上下行属性在所述至少两个上下行比例配 置下保持不变的子帧, 以形成所述固定子帧集合。
47.根据权利要求 45所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器用于获 取指示信息, 其中所述指示信息直接指定所述固定子帧集合中的所述子帧。
48.根据权利要求 45所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器用于获 取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中的 特定属性的子帧形成所述固定子帧集合。
49.根据权利要求 45-48任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 固定子帧集合为固定上行子帧集合和固定下行子帧集合中的至少一种, 其 中所述固定上行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动 态变化时均为上行子帧组成, 所述固定下行子帧集合中的子帧在所述 TDD 帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时均为下行子帧;
所述处理器进一步用于在所述固定上行子帧集合上进行上行 SPS传输, 或者在所述固定下行子帧集合上进行下行 SPS传输。
50.根据权利要求 49所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器用于 获取至少一第一参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置中 的上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述第一参考上下行比例配置 中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
51.根据权利要求 50所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 形成所述固定上行 子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置不同于形成所述固定下行 子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置。
52.根据权利要求 50或 51所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述形成所 述固定下行子帧集合所使用的所述第一参考上下行比例配置为第一系统信 息块指示的比例配置。
53.根据权利要求 48-52任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 第一参考上下行比例配置包括下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置以及 上行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置, 所述处理器用于获取至少一第一 参考上下行比例配置, 由所述下行 HARQ定时参考的上下行比例配置中的 上行子帧形成所述固定上行子帧集合, 由所述上行 HARQ定时参考的上下 行比例配置中的下行子帧和特殊子帧形成所述固定下行子帧集合。
54.根据权利要求 45所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器用于获 取 TDD帧的上下行比例配置集合, 其中所述上下行比例配置集合包括至少 两个上下行比例配置, 从所述至少两个上下行比例配置中选择上下行属性 与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧数最少的上下行比例配置, 并由选择的 所述上下行比例配置中与 SPS传输的传输方向相同的子帧形成所述固定子 帧集合。
55.根据权利要求 48-54任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器通过系统广播消息、 专用 RRC消息中的至少一种获取所述 TDD帧 的上下行比例配置集合。
56.根据权利要求 45-55任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器进一步用于在所述固定子帧集合中的所述上下行属性与 SPS传输对 应的反馈传输的传输方向相同的子帧上执行 SPS传输对应的反馈传输。
57.根据权利要求 45-56任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器进一步用于从所述固定子帧集合中与 SPS控制指令的传输方向相同 的子帧上获取 SPS控制指令, 其中所述 SPS控制指令包括 SPS激活指令、 SPS新传输数据块指令、 SPS重传数据块指令以及 SPS释放指令中的一个 或多个的组合。
58.根据权利要求 57所述的用户设备,其特征在于,用于获取所述 SPS 控制指令的所述子帧为所述固定子帧集合中能够调度 SPS传输的下行子帧。
59.根据权利要求 45-58任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器用于获取上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量, 根据所述周期偏移量对上行 SPS传输的传输周期进行偏移。
60.根据权利要求 59所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器用于 获取一第二参考上下行比例配置, 由所述第二参考上下行比例配置和所述 上行 SPS传输的子帧确定上行 SPS传输的周期偏移量。
61.根据权利要求 60所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第二参考上下 行比例配置为所述下行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述上行 HARQ 定时参考的上下行比例配置、 所述第一参考上下行比例配置中上行 子帧数最少的上下行比例配置中的一种。
62.根据权利要求 60所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述第二参考上下 行比例配置为 UE获取的 TDD上下行比例配置集合中上行子帧最少的 TDD 上下行比例配置。
63.根据权利要求 60至 62任意一项所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所 述第二参考上下行比例配置在协议中固定配置或预配置。
64.—种用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述用户设备包括处理器和存储器, 所述处理器与所述存储器电连接, 其中:
所述处理器用于在 TDD帧的上下行比例配置发生动态变化时, 判断执 行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧的上下行属性是否发生变化, 在所述上下行属 性发生变化时, 忽略所述 SPS传输; 所述存储器用于存储所述执行 SPS传输的 SPS可用子帧集合。
65.根据权利要求 64所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器进一步 用于判断所述 SPS传输是否为 SPS新数据传输,在所述 SPS传输为 SPS新 数据传输, 响应后续的调度指令重新执行忽略的所述 SPS新数据传输。
66.根据权利要求 64所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器进一步 用于将所述 SPS传输延迟至所述上下行属性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧 后面的第 W个 SPS可用子帧,或者将所述 SPS传输提前至至所述上下行属 性发生变化的所述 SPS可用子帧前面的第 M个 SPS可用子帧, 其中 W和 M分别为自然数。
PCT/CN2013/084073 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 一种半静态调度方法及用户设备 Ceased WO2015042771A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
MX2016003789A MX357739B (es) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 Metodo de planificacion semi-persistente y equipo de usuario.
BR112016006415A BR112016006415A8 (pt) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 método de planejamento semipersistente e equipamento de usuário
CN201380004159.4A CN104737575B (zh) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 一种半静态调度方法及用户设备
RU2016115722A RU2632250C1 (ru) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 Способ и абонентское устройство для полупостоянной диспетчеризации
EP13894665.2A EP3038398B1 (en) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 Semi-persistent scheduling method and user equipment
JP2016516550A JP6216042B2 (ja) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 半持続性スケジューリング方法及びユーザ機器
PCT/CN2013/084073 WO2015042771A1 (zh) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 一种半静态调度方法及用户设备
US15/078,838 US20160205683A1 (en) 2013-09-24 2016-03-23 Semi-persistent scheduling method and user equipment
ZA2016/02790A ZA201602790B (en) 2013-09-24 2016-04-22 Semi-persistent scheduling method and user equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2013/084073 WO2015042771A1 (zh) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 一种半静态调度方法及用户设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/078,838 Continuation US20160205683A1 (en) 2013-09-24 2016-03-23 Semi-persistent scheduling method and user equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015042771A1 true WO2015042771A1 (zh) 2015-04-02

Family

ID=52741727

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2013/084073 Ceased WO2015042771A1 (zh) 2013-09-24 2013-09-24 一种半静态调度方法及用户设备

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (1) US20160205683A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP3038398B1 (zh)
JP (1) JP6216042B2 (zh)
CN (1) CN104737575B (zh)
BR (1) BR112016006415A8 (zh)
MX (1) MX357739B (zh)
RU (1) RU2632250C1 (zh)
WO (1) WO2015042771A1 (zh)
ZA (1) ZA201602790B (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019525609A (ja) * 2016-08-12 2019-09-05 クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド 低レイテンシ通信のためのアップリンク半永続スケジューリング
WO2020087456A1 (zh) * 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 富士通株式会社 资源指示方法及其装置、通信系统

Families Citing this family (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6452048B2 (ja) * 2013-08-23 2019-01-16 シャープ株式会社 端末装置、基地局装置、通信方法、および、集積回路
US9826523B2 (en) * 2014-03-21 2017-11-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Semi-persistent scheduling for eIMTA in LTE
US10476694B2 (en) * 2015-01-30 2019-11-12 Kyocera Corporation Base station and user terminal, for transmitting and receiving multicast data using semi-persistent scheduling
US10075970B2 (en) 2015-03-15 2018-09-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Mission critical data support in self-contained time division duplex (TDD) subframe structure
US9936519B2 (en) 2015-03-15 2018-04-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Self-contained time division duplex (TDD) subframe structure for wireless communications
US10342012B2 (en) 2015-03-15 2019-07-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Self-contained time division duplex (TDD) subframe structure
US9814058B2 (en) 2015-05-15 2017-11-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Scaled symbols for a self-contained time division duplex (TDD) subframe structure
US9992790B2 (en) 2015-07-20 2018-06-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Time division duplex (TDD) subframe structure supporting single and multiple interlace modes
US10536966B2 (en) * 2016-12-09 2020-01-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Physical downlink control channel and hybrid automatic repeat request feedback for multefire coverage enhancement
US10863334B2 (en) * 2017-11-08 2020-12-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Non-orthogonal multiple access techniques for narrowband internet of things and machine type communication
JP7288902B2 (ja) * 2017-11-14 2023-06-08 オッポ広東移動通信有限公司 データ伝送方法、端末装置及びネットワーク装置
CA3088809A1 (en) * 2018-01-18 2019-07-25 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Time-domain resource determination method and apparatus, and computer storage medium
US11570771B2 (en) 2018-04-13 2023-01-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Evolved semi-persistent scheduling for wireless communications
US11382068B2 (en) * 2019-04-04 2022-07-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Semi-persistent scheduling for broadcast or multicast
US11622347B2 (en) * 2020-06-01 2023-04-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Semi-persistent scheduling for subband full-duplex slots
WO2022032477A1 (en) * 2020-08-11 2022-02-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Indication of transmission of semi-persistent scheduling (sps) packets
US11895685B2 (en) * 2021-03-15 2024-02-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Modifications to configured grants and semi-persistent scheduling configurations based on time domain patterns

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2408237A1 (en) * 2007-08-20 2012-01-18 Research In Motion Limited Discontinuous reception with extended awake period
CN102647718A (zh) * 2012-04-16 2012-08-22 北京大学 一种对VoIP业务进行混合资源分配的方法
CN103313254A (zh) * 2013-06-06 2013-09-18 北京中科晶上科技有限公司 一种lte上行调度的方法及装置

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140241149A1 (en) * 2013-02-27 2014-08-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and methods for synchronizing wireless communication device configurations
US8451803B2 (en) * 2007-10-05 2013-05-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatus for managing measurement behavior of DRX mode UE
CN102124802B (zh) * 2008-06-24 2014-03-12 株式会社Ntt都科摩 基站装置和通信控制方法
US8363611B2 (en) * 2009-01-07 2013-01-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Semi-persistent scheduling resource release with DRX command
US9237596B2 (en) * 2009-11-15 2016-01-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for performing power control by terminal in wireless communication system using multiple carriers
WO2012113131A1 (en) * 2011-02-21 2012-08-30 Renesas Mobile Corporation Dynamic uplink/downlink configuration for time division duplex

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2408237A1 (en) * 2007-08-20 2012-01-18 Research In Motion Limited Discontinuous reception with extended awake period
CN102647718A (zh) * 2012-04-16 2012-08-22 北京大学 一种对VoIP业务进行混合资源分配的方法
CN103313254A (zh) * 2013-06-06 2013-09-18 北京中科晶上科技有限公司 一种lte上行调度的方法及装置

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019525609A (ja) * 2016-08-12 2019-09-05 クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド 低レイテンシ通信のためのアップリンク半永続スケジューリング
JP7000415B2 (ja) 2016-08-12 2022-01-19 クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド 低レイテンシ通信のためのアップリンク半永続スケジューリング
WO2020087456A1 (zh) * 2018-11-01 2020-05-07 富士通株式会社 资源指示方法及其装置、通信系统
US11997655B2 (en) 2018-11-01 2024-05-28 Fujitsu Limited Resource indication method and apparatus and communication system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20160205683A1 (en) 2016-07-14
BR112016006415A2 (pt) 2017-08-01
BR112016006415A8 (pt) 2020-03-10
RU2632250C1 (ru) 2017-10-04
EP3038398A1 (en) 2016-06-29
MX357739B (es) 2018-07-20
ZA201602790B (en) 2019-04-24
JP2016537838A (ja) 2016-12-01
EP3038398A4 (en) 2016-08-31
CN104737575B (zh) 2019-03-08
CN104737575A (zh) 2015-06-24
MX2016003789A (es) 2016-11-07
EP3038398B1 (en) 2018-07-18
JP6216042B2 (ja) 2017-10-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6216042B2 (ja) 半持続性スケジューリング方法及びユーザ機器
US10595166B2 (en) Systems and methods for processing time reduction signaling
US10581559B2 (en) User Equipment, base stations and methods
JP6156957B2 (ja) プログラム、コンピュータ可読媒体および拡張ノードb
CN111800869B (zh) 物理上行控制信道pucch传输方法、终端设备和网络设备
US10594447B2 (en) Data transmission method, terminal, and ran device
JP2022050577A (ja) 低複雑度の狭帯域端末のためのランダムアクセス手順でのharqメッセージに割り当てられたリソースを示すための方法
CN104160648B (zh) 数据传输方法及装置
US20180048447A1 (en) User equipments, base stations and methods
US20220360414A1 (en) Communication processing method and communication device
JP7787082B2 (ja) サイドリンク送信の再送方法及び装置
CN114930752A (zh) 连续数据分组反馈
WO2018036433A1 (zh) 信息发送、接收方法及装置、基站、终端
CN108781417A (zh) 当上行链路传输在时间上重叠至少一个符号持续时间时用于上行链路功率控制的方法和装置
CN111133708A (zh) 使能在无线网络中基于数据传输的抢占来在下行链路子帧期间进行上行链路传输
JP2015512571A (ja) Ltefddネットワークにおける半二重fdd動作のための方法
WO2014067140A1 (zh) 一种信息传输方法、用户设备及基站
WO2014121687A1 (zh) 一种通信处理方法及装置
WO2017166213A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及装置
KR101689864B1 (ko) 교차 캐리어 스케줄링 제어 방법 및 장치
CN112398592B (zh) 反馈信息传输方法及通信装置
CN103096494B (zh) 基于跨载波调度的数据传输方法、用户设备和基站
US20200014496A1 (en) Method, device and system for data transmission
US10609725B2 (en) Data transmission method of system, user equipment, and base station
US20240298339A1 (en) Data transmission method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13894665

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2016516550

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2016/003789

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: 2013894665

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112016006415

Country of ref document: BR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: IDP00201602674

Country of ref document: ID

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2016115722

Country of ref document: RU

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112016006415

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20160323